+ All Categories
Home > Documents > ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

Date post: 21-Dec-2021
Category:
Upload: others
View: 2 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
184
J ~ n an abha ßbDbB ßbDbB ßbDbB ßbDbB ßbDbB VOLUME 38 2008 ISSN 0304-9892 Published by : The Vij ~ n ana Parishad of India DAYANAND VEDIC POSTGRADUATE COLLEGE (Bundelkhand University) ORAI, U.P., INDIA
Transcript
Page 1: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

J~n –an –abha ßbDbBßbDbBßbDbBßbDbBßbDbB

VOLUME 38

2008

ISSN 0304-9892

Published by :

The Vij~n–ana Parishad of IndiaDAYANAND VEDIC POSTGRADUATE COLLEGE

(Bundelkhand University)ORAI, U.P., INDIA

Page 2: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

J~N – AN – ABHA

EDITORSH. M. Srivastava R.C. Singh ChandelUniversity of Victoria AND D.V. Postgraduate CollegeVictorria, B.C., Canada Orai, U.P., India

Editorial Advisory BoardR.G. Buschman (Langlois, OR) A. Carbone (Rende, Italy)K.L. Chung (Stanford) Pranesh Kumar (Prince George, BC, Canada)L.S. Kothari (Delhi) I. Massabo (Rende, Italy)B.E. Rhoades (Bloomington, IN) R.C. Mehrotra (Jaipur)D. Roux (Milano, Italy) C. Prasad (Allahabad)V. K. Verma (Delhi) S.P. Singh (St. John's)K. N. Srivastava (Bhopal) L. J. Slater (Cambridge, U.K.)H. K. Srivastava (Lucknow) R.P. Singh (Petersburg)M.R. Singh (London, ON, Canada) P.W. Karlsson (Lyngby, Denmark)S. Owa (Osaka, Japan) N. E. Cho (Pusan, Korea)

Vij~n –ana Parishad of India(Society for Applications of Mathematics)

(Registered under the Societies Registration Act XXI of 1860)Office : D.V. Postgraduate College, Orai-285001, U.P., India

COUNCILPresident : G.C. Sharma (Agra)Vice-Presidents : S.L. Singh (Hardwar)

: A.P. Singh (Jammu): Principal

D.V. Postgraduate College, (Orai)(N. D. Samadhia )

Secretary-Treasurer : R. C. Singh Chandel (Orai)Foreign Secretary : H.M. Srivastava (Victoria)

MEMBERSV.P. Saxena (IPP) (Bhopal) R.D. Agrawal (Vidisha)P. Chaturani (Mumbai) Karmeshu (Delhi)A. P. Dwivedi (Kanpur) P.L. Sachdeva (Banglore)K. C. Prasad (Ranchi) M.N. Mehta (Surat)S.N. Pandey (Gorakhpur) K.R. Pardasani (Bhopal)Madhu Jain (Agra) Abha Tenguria (Bhopal)B.S. Bhadauria (Varanasi) H. Kumar (Kanpur)

Page 3: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

INFORMATION FOR CONTRIBUTORS/SUBSCRIBERSJ~n –an –abha is published annually. It is an interdisciplinary journal devoted primarily to

research articles in all areas of the mathematical, physical and biological sciences; itdoes,however, encourage original mathematical works which are motivated by and relevantto applications in the social, management, biomedical or engineering sciences. Papers intendedfor publication in this journal should be in typed form or offset-reproduced (not dittoed), A4size double spaced with generous margins and they may be written in Hindi or English.Manuscripts in duplicate (hard copy along with soft copy typed in MS word/PageMaker), mentioning 2000 Mathematics Subject Classification, Key Words and authorsE-Mail addresses also on front page, if possible, may be submitted to either of theEditors. It is mandatory for every author in J~n –an –abha to be a member of the Vij~n–ana Parishadof India in good standing and to pay publication charges which will be based upon the numberof printed pages.

The submission of a paper implies the author's assurance that the paper has not beenwidely circulated, copyrighted, published or submitted for publication elsewhere.

Authors are advised to submit only neatly (and carefully) type-written and throughlychecked manuscripts employing accepted conventions of references, notations, displays, etc.;all typescripts not in a format suitable for publication in this journal will be returned unrefereed.

25 reprints are provided free for each article; additional reprints, in multiples of 25 maybe obtained at cost price, if the authors give prior intimation while returning proofs.

Effective with Volume 34 the price per volume is Rs. 200.00 (or U.S. $25.00). Individualmembers of the Vij~n –ana Parishad of India are entitled to free subscriptions to the currentissues of this journal. Individual membership: Rs. 100.00 (or U.S. $20.00) per calender year;Life membership : Rs. 1000.00 (or U.S. $200.00). Back volumes are available at special price.(Payment of dues by cheques must include appropriate bank charges.)

[By a reciprocity agreement with the American Mathematical Society, an individual/life member of the Parishad residing outside North American continent may join the Societyby submitting an application for membership on the form that may be obtained from the officeof the Society (P.O. Box 6248, Providence, Rhode, Island 02940, U.S.A.) and by payingthe Society's current dues as a reciprocity member at a considerably reduced rate; the usualrequirements that the applicant be endorsed by two members of the Society and that thecandidate be elected by the Council are waived, but this reduction in dues to the Society doesnot apply to those individual/life members of the Parishad who reside, even on a temporarybasis, in the North American area (i.e., U.S.A. and Canada).

The mathematical content of this journal is indexed in the Society's biweekly CurrentMathematical Publications and is reviewed, among others, by Mathematical Reviews(U.S.A), Zentralblatt für Mathematik (Germany) and Applied Mechanics Reviews(U.S.A.).]

All communications regarding subsriptions, order for back volumes, membership of theVij~n –ana Parishad of India, change of address, etc. and all books for review, should be addressedto:

The SecretaryVij~n –ana Parishad of India

D.V. Postgraduat e College Orai 285001, U.P., India or77DA, Sheeshmahal Apartment, Shalimar Gaon, New Delhi

E-Mail :[email protected] : 05162-251607

Page 4: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

FINITE CAPACITY QUEUEING SYSTEM WITH QUEUE DEPENDENT SERVERS ANDDISCOURAGEMENT -Madhu Jian and Pankaj SharmaSOME GENERATING FUNCTIONS OF CERTAIN POLYNOMIALS USING LIEALGEBRAIC METHODS -M.B. El-KhazendarUNSTEDAY INCOMPRESSIBLE MHD HEAT TRANSER FLOW THROUGH A VARIABLEPOROUS MEDIUM IN A HORIZONTAL POROUS CHANNEL UNDER SLIP BOUNDARYCONDITIONS -N.C.Jain and Dinesh Kumar VijayREDUCIBILITY OF THE QUARDUPLE HYPERGEOMETRIC FUNCTIONS OF EXTON

-B. Khan, M. Kamarujjama and Nassem A. KhanCONVERGENCE RESULT OF (L,) UNIFORM LIPSCHITZ ASYMPTOTICALLY QUASINONEXPANSIVE MAPPINGS IN UNIFORMLY CONVEX BANACH SPACE

-G.S. SalujaON SPECIAL UNION AND HYPERASYMPTOTIC CURVES OF A KAEHLERIANHYPERSURFACE -A. K. Singh and A.K. GahlotMEROMORPHIC UNIVALINT FUNCTIONS WITH ALLTERNATING COEEFICIENTS

-K.K. Dixit and Indu Bala MishraA MATHEMATICAL MODEL FOR MIGRATION OF CAPILLARY SPROUTS WITHDIFFUSION OF CHEMOTTRACTANT CONCENTRATION DURING TUMORANGIOGENESIS -Madhu Jain, G. C. Sharma and Atar SinghDIFFUSION-REACTION MODELFOR MASS TRANSPORTATION IN BRAIN TISSUES

-Madhu Jain, G.C. Sharma and Ram SinghRELIABILITY ESTIMATION OF PARALLEL-SERIES SYSTEM USING C-H-AALGORITHM -A.K. Agarwal and Suneet SaxenaA NOTE ON PAIRWISE SLIGHTLY SEMI-CONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS

-M.C.Sharma and V.K.SolankiFIXED POINT THEOREMS FOR AN ADMISSIBLE CLASS OF ASYMPTOTICALLYREGULAR SEMIGROUPS IN LP- SPACES

-G.S. SalujaSOME INTEGRAL FORMULAS INVOLVING A GENERAL SEQUENCE OF FUNCTION, AGENERAL CLASS OF POLYNOMIALS AND THE MULTIVARIABLE H-FUNCTION

-V.G. Gupta and Suman JainMAXIMIZING SURVIVABILITY OF ACYCLIC MULTI-STATE TRANSMISSIONNETWORKS (AMTNs) -Raju Singh Gaur and Sanjay ChaudharyTHE INTEGRATION OF CERTAIN PRODUCTS INVOLVING H-FUNCTION WITHGENERAL POLYNOMIALS AND INTEGRAL FUNCTION OF TWO COMPLEX VARIABLES

-V.G. Gupta and Nawal Kishor JangidSTUDY OF VELOCITY AND DISTRIBUTION OF MAGNETIC FIELD IN LAMINARSTEADY FLOW BETWEEN PARALLEL PLATES

-Pratap SinghA NOTE ON THE ERROR BOUND OF A PERIODIC SIGNAL IN HOLDER METRIC BYTHE DEFERRED CESARO PROCESSOR

-Bhavana Soni andPravin Kumar MahajanAPPLICATIONS OF SYMMETRY GROUPS IN HEAT EQUATION

-V. G. Gupta, Kapil Pal and Rita MathurA GENERALIZATION OF MULTIVARIABLE POLYNOMIALS

-R.C. Singh Chandel and K.P. TiwariTHE DISTRIBUTION OF SUM OF MIXED INDEPENDENT RANDOM VARIABLES ONEOF THEM ASSOCIATED WITH H -FUNCTION

-Mahesh Kumar GuptaON GENERATING RELATIONSHIPS FOR FOX'S H-FUNCTION AND MULTIVARIABLEH-FUNCTION -B.B. Jaimini and Hemlata Saxena

CONTENTS

...1-12

...13-18

...19-32

...33-40

...41-48

...49-56

...57-64

...65-75

...77-84

...85-88

...89-94

...95-104

...105-112

...113-124

...125-134

...135-140

...141-146

...147-152

...153-160

...161-168

...169-179

Page 5: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

FINITE CAPACITY QUEUEING SYSTEM WITH QUEUE DEPENDENTSERVERS AND DISCOURAGEMENT

ByMadhu Jian and Pankaj Sharma

Department of Mathematics, Institute of Basic ScienceDr. B.R. Ambedkar University, Agra-282002, Uttar Pradesh, India

E-mail : [email protected] and [email protected]

(Received : November 15, 2007)

ABSTRACTAn analytical study for optimal threshold policy for queueing system with

state dependent heterogeneous servers and discouragement is presented. In thisinvestigation the discouraging behavior of the customers has been considered dueto which the customers may balk or renege. To reduce the discouraging behaviorof the customers there is a provision of removable heterogeneous servers. Theservice rate of the servers are different and the number of servers in the systemchanges depending on the queue length. The first server starts service only whenN customers are accumulated in the queue and once he starts serving, continuesto serve until the system becomes empty. The jth( j=2,3...,r) server turns on whenthere are Nj–1 customers present in the system and are removed when the queuesize ceases to less than Nj–1. By employing the recursive method we derive thesteady state characteristics of the system such as queue size distribution, theaverage number of customers in the system, the average number of waitingcustomers, etc. Sensitivity analysis have been facilitated by taking numericalillustration.2000 Mathematics Subject Classification : Primary 90B15; Secondary 90B50Keywords and Phrases : Finite capacity, Queue dependent servers,Discouragement, Heterogeneous servers, Queue size, Threshold policy.

1. Introduction. In real life situations, it is common to use some extraservers to reduce the congestion by assuming that the number of servers changesaccording to the queue length. The decision makers often employ someheterogeneous removable servers in the system to reduce the discouraging behaviorof customers and waiting time. Such situations can be encountered in many day-to-day congestion situations including banks, check-out counters, super market,cafeterias, petrol pumps, etc.

There are several queueing systems for which based on cost criteria, it isrecommended that the number of servers should be increased one by one depending

Page 6: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

2

upon the queue length. Garg and Singh (1993) investigated queue dependent serversqueueing system to determine the optimal queue length at which the next serveris provided in order to gain the maximum profit. Yamashiro (1996) considered asystem where the number of servers changes depending on the queue length. Aqueueing system with queue dependent servers and finite capacity was consideredby Wang and Tai (2000). Jain (2005) analysed finite capacity M/M/r queueing systemwith queue dependent servers. Processor-shared service system with queue-dependent processors was also studied by Jain et al. (2005).

In classical N-policy queueing system, when there are N customers presentin the system only then the server starts providing service to the customers. Manyresearchers have contributed to the studies on N-policy models in differentframewaorks. Larsen and Agrawala(1983) investigated optimal policy to minimizethe mean response time for M/M/2 queueing system. Medhi and Templeton (1992)analyzed the Poisson input queue under N-policy and with a general start up time.Kavusturucu and Gupta (1998) developed a methodology for analyzing finite buffertandem manufacturing system with N-policy. Jau (2003) and Jain (2003) consideredthe operating characteristics for a general input queue and redundant arrivalsystem, respectively under N-policy. Jain et al. (2004) analyzed N-policy for amachine repair system with spares and reneging. A two-threshold vacation policyfor multi server queueing system was given by Tian and Zhey (2006).

The discouraging behavior of the customers has also been incorporated byseveral researchers while developing the queueing models of real life congestionproblems. A prospective customer on arrival may join the queue or may balkdepending on the number of customers present in the queue. Ankar and Gafarian(1963) analyzed some queueing problems with reneging. Blackburn (1972) and Gupta(1994) discussed different types of queues with balking and reneging. Jain andVaidhya (1999) considered the multi server queue with discouragement andadditional servers. Jain and Sharma (2002) investigated a multi server queue withadditional server and discouragement.

To reduce the discouraging behavior of the customers, one of the importantattributes to be considered by system organizers is to increase the number of serverswhile analyzing the congestion situations in different frameworks. In order toreduce the balking/reneging, the service providers can make the provision of theremovable additional servers apart from some permanent servers from cost/spaceconstraint view point. Abou and Shawky (1992) considered the additional serversin the single server Markovian over flow queue with balking and reneging. Jain(1998) analysed M/M/m queue with discouragement and additional servers. Jainand Singh (2002) considered a M/M/m queue with balking, reneging and additionalservers. A multi server queueing model with discouragement and additional servers

Page 7: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

3

was studied by Jain and Singh (2004) in order to facilitate a comparative study formulti servers queueing system with and without additional servers. Controllablemulti server queue with balking was investigated by Jain and Sharma (2005). Inthis model they have incorporated an additional server which is added and removedat pre-specified threshold level of queue size to control the balking behavior of thecustomers.

In this paper we consider a finite capacity Markov queueing system withqueue dependent heterogeneous servers and discouragement uder optimal thresholdpolicy. The concept that the heterogeneous servers may be employed in the systemone by one depending on the queue length can be helpful to reduce cost as well asthe discouraging behavior of the customers in the system. The steady state queuesize distribution by using recursive method is obtained which is further used todetermine various system characteristis. The remaining part of the paper isorganized as follows. In section 2, the model is described by stating requisitenotations and assumptions. Queue size distribution and other system metrics havebeen derived in section 3 and 4, respectively. Some special cases are deduced bysetting appropriate parameters, in Section 5. Sensitivity analysis is given in section6. Section 7 concludes the paper and highlights the future scope of the model.

2. The Model . Consider a Markov queueing system with finite capacityand queue dependent heterogeneous servers. The concept of discouragement andheterogeneous removable servers under optimal control policy are taken intoconsideration. We assume that queue dependent r(>1) servers offer services to thecustomers who arrive in Poisson fashion. By the queue dependent heterogeneousservers we mean to say that the servers turn on one by one depending upon thequeue length according to a pre-specified rule and renders service with differentrates, the service times taken by each server, are assumed to be exponentialdistributed. The arriving customers may balk with probability 1-bj, j(j=0,1,...,r)denotes the number of servers rendering service in the system. The customersmay also renege from the queue after waiting for some time; according to exponentialdistribution with parameter j, (j=0,1,2,...,r) here j indicates the number of serverspresent in the system. The customers are served according to first come first servediscipline and the capacity of the system including those in service is of size K.

The state dependent arrival rate of the customers are given as follows :

KnNbrjNnNb

Nnbn

rr

jjj

1

1

11

;1,...,3,2, ;

0 ;

...(1)

The effective service rates after incorporating the reneging concept, can be

Page 8: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

4

given by :

r

irri

j

ijjji

KnNrn

rjNnNjn

NnnNnn

n

11

11

111

00

;

1,...,3,2, ;

N ;11 ;1

...(2)

The number of servers employed in the system depends upon the number ofcustomers present in the system according to the following threshold policy:✦ The first server turns on when N(>1) cutomers are present in the system

and turns off as soon as the system become empty.✦ When there are more than N customers waiting in queue he provides service

to the customers with the faster rate 1, otherwise serves the customerswith rate 0.

✦ The jth (2,3,4,...,r) server provides service to the customers when there aremore than Nj-1 customers present in the system, and as soon as the queuelength become less than Nj-1 the jth server is removed from the system.

Let P(j,n) denotes the steady state probability that there are n(n1) customerspresent in the system and j(j=1,2,...,r) heterogeneous servers are providing serviceto the customers. In our Model n denote the number of customers present in thesystem, i(i=0,1,2) denotes the level of the service state and j–1 (2,3,...,r) denotesthe number of removable heterogeneous servers employed in the system.

Let P(0,n) denote the steady state probability that there are 'n' customersin the system before start of the service 0 n N–1. P(j,Nj(i)) denotes the probabilitythat there are Nj customers present in the system being served by the newly addedserver or previously existing server when I takes value 1 or 2 respectively, andthere are j servers in the system. We denote the probability of Nj customers in the

system by 2,1,, jjj NjPNjPNjP . Here 1, jNjP is the probability that

the Njth customer in the system is being served by the jth server while 2,1 jNjP

denotes the probability that thjN customer is being served by the (j+1)th server,

while 2,1 jNjP denotes the probability that thjN customer is being served by

the (j+1)th server without having any reneging probability. We have also consideredthat when there are Nr customers waiting before the servers, then all the 'r'removable servers are available for service. The steady state equations for the

Page 9: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

5

finite source multi server queueing system are given by

1,10,0 01 PPb ...(3)

11 ;2,0,0 11 NnnPbnPb ...(4)

2,11,1 0001 PPb ...(5)

NnnPnnPbnPnb 2 ; 1,11,1,11 001001 ...(6)

;1,11,11,0,11 1111001 NPNNPbNPbNPNb ...(7)

21;1,11,1,11 1111111 NnNnPnnPbnPnb ...(8)

1,112,11,12 11111111111 NPNNPbNPNb

;2,1 12 NP ...(9)

1,21,1,11 121111112 NPNPbNPNb ...(10)

1,212,1 1211122 NPNNPb ...(11)

,21;1,11, 1 jjjjjj NnNnjPnnPbnjPnb

1,...,2,1 rj ...(12)

1,2,1,1 jjjjjjjjj NjPNNjPbNjPNb

1,...,2,1; 2,11 rjNP jj ...(13)

)1(,....,2,1;1,11,1, 11 rjNjPNjPbNjPNb jjjjjjjj ...(14)

1,...,2,1; 1,112,1 1111 rjNjPNNPb jjjjjjj ...(15)

KnNnrPnnrPbnrPnb rrrrr 1; 1,11,, ...(16)

1,, KrPbKrP rr ...(17)

3. Queue Size Distribution. In this section, we derive the mathematicalexpressions for the queue size distribution and average queue length for finitecapacity model by employing recursive methed.For brevity of notaion, we denote

j

ijij jnn

1

; 1,....,3,2,1 rjNnN jj

;1

r

r

iir rnn

KnNr 1

Page 10: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

6

;1,...,2,1,, ;

1 ;1

01

1

0

1

rjNNNnNjn

b

Nnnb

rjjj

iji

j

o

n

1

0

1111

11

0

.1,...,3,2,,,1

,1

N

i j

jj

j

jjj

ijji

jN

i

jjN rj

bR

br

jN

brA

j

The steady state probability P(1,n) is obtained by solving equations (3) to (8) as :

Nn

iiN

n

i

i

jjn

NnNPrA

NnPrnP

01

1

0 0

; 0,0

1 ; 0,0,1

...(18)

For ,1,...,3,2 rj we obtain probabilities using equations (9)-(15) as

;

1

0,01, 1

1

1

1

1

1

1

j

K

j

K

KKN

KKN

KN

j

K

Nn

iNiiN

KKKN

RrrrrRr

PrRrrAnjP

KKK

K

1,...,3,2,1 rjNnN jj ...(19)

Also solving equations (16) and (17), we get

KnN

RrrrrRr

PrRrrAnrP rr

K

r

K

KKN

kKN

kN

r

K

Nn

iNiiN

KKkN

KKK

K

11

1

1

11

1

1 ;1

0,01,

...(20)

0,0P can be obtained by using normalizing condition

1

0 1

1

2 1 1

1

1 1

1,, ,1,0N

n

N

n

r

j

N

Nn

K

Nn

j

j r

nrPnjPnPnP .

Page 11: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

7

At the threshold level the probabilities are obtained as :

1,...,2,1;,1

11, 1

rjNjP

RrrrrR

rrRrNjP jjj

Njj

Nj

jjN

jN

j

jj

jj

...(21)

and

1,...,2,1;,1

2, 1

2

rjNjPRrrrrR

rRrNjP jjj

Njj

Nj

jjN

j

jj

j

...(22)

Also

.1,...,2,1,2,1,, rjNjPNjPNjP jjj

4. Performance Metrics. This section is devoted to some performancecharacteristics by using steady state queue size distribution as follows:Pr (1 server is rendering service in the system)=P(1)=Pr ob{1<nN1}

N

n

N

Nn

Nn

iN

n

i

i

jjn PrAPr

1 1 01

1

0 0

1

0,00,0 ...(23)

Pr (j servers are rendering service in the system)=P(j)=Prob.{Nj-1 n Nj}

;

1

0,01

1

1

1

11

1

1

1

1

j

K

j

K

KKN

KKN

KN

j

K

N

Nn

Nn

iNiiN

KKKN

RrrrrRr

PrRrrA

KKK

j

j

K

1,...,3,2,1 rjNnN jj (24)

Pr (all r servers are rendering service in the system)=P(r)=Prob{Nr-1nK}

;

1

0,01

1

1

1

11

1

1

1

1

j

K

j

K

KKN

KKN

KN

j

K

N

Nn

Nn

iNiiN

KKKN

RrrrrRr

PrRrrA

KKK

j

j

K

1,...,3,2,1 rjNnN jj (25)

The average number of customers in the system having r heterogeneous queuedependent removable servers which are employed at thresholds

121 ,...,,, rNNNNN is obtained using:

K

nnnPNrL

0

:

Page 12: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

8

N

n

N

Nn

Nn

iiN

n

i

i

jjn rAr

0

1

1 0

1

0 0

1

1

2 11

1

1

11

1

1

1 1

1

r

j

N

Nnj

K

KKN

KKN

Kj

KN

j

K

Nn

iNiiN

KKKNj

jKKK

K

RrrrrRr

rRrrA

K

Nnr

K

r

K

KKN

KKN

KN

r

K

Nn

iNiiN

KKKN

rKKK

K

PRrrrrRr

rRrrA

1

0,01

1

1

1

1

11

1

1

...(26)

The throughout of the system is given by

K

nnnP

1. ...(27)

5. Special Cases. In this section, we discuss some special cases that canbe deduced from analytical results derive in the previous sections.Case I: M/M/R Finite Capacity Queueing System With Queue Dependent

Servers. In this case we set bj=1 and rjj ,...,2,1,00 , and avoid the first

threshold level i.e. we set N=1 then our results tally with those of Jain's (2005)model for M/M/r queue with heterogeneous queue dependent servers. In particular,we come across the following special situations:i. If we set r=3, then our results coincide with the results obtained by Wang

and Tai (2000).ii. When the system capacity is infinite i.e. (K), then the results correspond

to the finite capacity queueing system with three queue dependentheterogeneous servers model which was discussed by Wang and Tai (2000).

iii. We can obtain the results for model of queue dependent homogeneous servers

by setting r ...10 for this model.

Case II : When N=1, N1=2, N3=3,...,Nr=r, bj=1 and j=0(j=0,1,2,...,r), then ourmodel converts to M/M/r queueing model with heterogeneous server.

Case III: When N=1, N1=2, N3=3,....,Nr=r, bj=1, j=0(j=0,1,2,...,r), j then

model provides results for classical M/M/r queueing model with homogeneous

Page 13: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

9

server.5. Sensitivity Analysis. In this section, the sensitivity analysis is

performed to examine the effect of various system descriptors on the average queuelength and throughout of the system. A computer program is developed by usingthe mathematical software MATLAB on Pentium IV. Various performance indicesare computed and summarized in tables 1 to 3 by setting the default parameters as

N=1, K=50, r=3, b1=0.4, , 5.1,5.1 00 .3,2.00 Some more results are

also obtained and displayed in figures 1-4 using the default parameters as N=1,

K=50, r=3, b1=1, , 5.1,5.1 00 .5.1,2.00 The following three policies

having different threshold parameters are taken into consideration:Policy 1: In this policy, the homogeneous servers turn on one by one with the

arrival of each customers i.e. 1,1 jN j .

Policy 2: In this case, the heterogeneous servers activate one by one with the

arrival of customers i.e. 1 jN j also we set 011.01 jj .

Policy 3: For this policy, we consider the heterogeneous removable three servers

who starts the service according to rule jN j 3 and we chosen 011.01 jj .

Table 1 shows the effect of N, and arrival rate (). Both, average queuelength (L) and through put () of the system increase with the increase in and b1.

Tables 2 and 3 depict the effect of (N, 0 ) v (N, ) on the average queue length (L)

and through put (). We note that the average queue length (L) and through put ()

decrease as 0 increase but both L and increases as b1 increases. Effect of N and

0 are demonstrated in table 3. When we increase the 0 , L decreases and

increases. but effect is not much significant.From figures 1 and 2, we see that the average queue length (L) increases

(decreases) with arrival rate (service rate ) for the different policies, which iswhat we expect in the real life situations. Also it is noted from figures 3 and 4, thatthe average queue length (L) decreases (increases) with the increase in reneging

parameter 0 (joining parameter b1) for the different policies. If homogeneous

servers are taken into consideration i.e. for policy 1, the average queue length ishigher in comparison to the policies 2 and 3, where heterogeneous servers areemployed. The queue length is slightly higher in policy 3 where heterogeneousservers turn on with the additional workload of 3 customers, in comparison topolicy 2 where heterogeneous servers turn on with the addition of one customer;this pattern matches with physical situations.

Page 14: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

10

Page 15: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

11

Over all, we conclude that the average queue length (L) reduces (increases)

with the increase in N, 0 and 0 (and b1). The through put () shows the

increasing trends with the parameters N, , b1, 0 and 0 which is quite obvious.

By incorporation of additional removable servers, there is remarkable decrementin the queue length which promotes the provision of a pool of additional serversalong with permanent servers.

6. Discussion. In this paper, we have studied a finite capacity multi serverqueueing system with queue dependent removable servers and discouragementunder N-policy. The assumption of discouraging behavior of customres makes ourmodel more versatile as it deals with more realistic congestion situations. Toreduce the cost, the decision makers are suggested to employ heterogeneous servesthat may further be removed after pre specified threshold level. The costrelationship established is helpful to determine the optimal queue level to introducethe removable servers in order to gain the maximum net profit.

Page 16: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

12

REFERENCES[1] M.O. Abou-El-Ata and A.I. Shawky; The single server Markovian overflow queue with balking,

reneging and an additional server for longer queues, Microelectron. Reliab., 32 (1992), 1389-1394.

[2] C.J. Anker and A.V. Gafarian, Queueing with reneging and multiple heterogeneous servers, NavalRes. Log., Quart, 10 No. 1 (1963), 125-149.

[3] J.D. Blackburn, Optimal control of single server queue with balking and reneging, Manage Sci.,19 No.8 (1972), 297-379.

[4] R.L. Garg and P. Singh, Queue dependent servers queueing system, Microelectron. Reliab. 33(1993), 2289-2295.

[5] S.M. Gupta, Interrelationship between queueing models with balking and reneging and machinerepair problem with warm spares. Microelectron. Reliab., 34 No. 2, (1994), 201-209.

[6] M. Jain and P. Singh, A multi server queueing model with discouragement and additional servers,Recent Advances in Operations Research, Information Technology and Industry, (M. Jain and G.C.Sharma (Eds)), S.R. Scientific Pub., Agra India (2004).

[7] M. Jain, M/M/m queue with discouragment and additional servers, Journal of G.S.R., 36 No. 1-2,(1998), 30-42.

[8] M. Jain and V. Vaidhya, M/M/m/K queue with discouragement and additional servers, Opsearch36 No.1 (1999), 73-80.

[9] M. Jain, N-policy for redundant repairable system with additional repairmen, Opsearch, 40 No.2, (2003), 97-114.

[10] M. Jain, Finite capacity M/M/r queueing system with queue dependent servers, Comput. Math.Appl., 50 (2005), 187-199.

[11] M. Jain and G.C. Sharma, M/M/m/K queue with additional servers and discouragement, Int. J.Engg., 15 No. 4 (2002), 349-354.

[12] M. Jain and P. Sharma, Controllable multi server queue with balking, Int. J. Engg., 18 No.3(2005), 263-271.

[13] M. Jain and P. Singh, M/M/m queue with balking, reneging and additional servers, Int. J. Engg.,15 No. 2 (2002), 169-178.

[14] M. Jain, Rakhee and S. Maheshwari, N-policy for a machine repair system with spares andreneging, Appl.Math. Model., 28 No. 6 (2004), 513-531.

[15] M. Jain, G.C.Sharma and C.Shakhar, Processor shared service system with queue dependentprocessors, Comput. Oper. Res., 32, (2005), 629-641.

[16] C. Jau, The operating characteristics analysis on general input queue with N-policy anda start uptimes, Math. Oper. Res., 57 No.2 (2003), 235-254.

[17] A. Kavusturucu and S.M. Gupta, A methodology for analyzing finite buffer tandem manufacturingsystems witn N-policy, Comput. Indust. Engg., 34 issue 4, (1998), 837-843.

[18] R.L. Larcen and A.K. Agrawala, Control of a heterogeneous two server exponential queueingsystem, IEEE Trans. Soft. Engg., 9 (1983), 522-529.

[19] J. Medhi and J.G.C. Templeton; A poisson input queue under N-policy and with a general setuptime, Comput. Oper. Res., 19 No.1 (1992) 35-41.

[20] N. Tian and Z.G. Zhang, A two threshold vacation policy in multi server queueing systems, Eur. J.Oper. Res., 168 (2006), 153-163.

[21] K.H. Wang and K.Y. Tai, A queueing system with queue dependent servers and finite capacity.Appl. Math. Model., 24 (2000), 807-814.

[22] M. Yamashiro, A system where the number of servers changes depending on the queue length,Microelectron. Relab., 36 (1996), 389-391.

Page 17: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

SOME GENERATING FUNCTIONS OF CERTAIN POLYNOMIALSUSING LIE ALGEBRAIC METHODS

ByM.B. El-Khazendar

Department of MathematicsAlazhar University-Gaza, P.O. Box 1277, Gaza, Plestine

e-mail :[email protected]

(Received : November 15, 2007)

ABSTRACTIn ths present paper a group theoretic method is applied to the differential

eqation whose solution is xfvnF ;;,12 . Then we study in details the case

xexf . We consider six-parameter Lie group for this hypergeometric function,

which does not seem to appear earlier. By means of this group theoretic methodsome new generating functions are obtained from which several new specialgenerating functions can be easily derived.2000 Mathematics Subject Classification : 22E30, 22E80, 33C05Keywords and Phrases : Hypergeometric function, Lie group, generatingfunctions

1. Introduction. The hypergeometric function of one variable is introducedby Gauss in (1822) and defined by

...

1..2.11.1

.1

.1

!;;,

2

012

cczbbaa

zcba

nz

cba

zcbaFn

n n

nn(1.1)

where (a)n denote the Pochhammer symbol defined by

...3,2,1 if 1...1

0 if 1nnaaan

a n (1.2)

The hypergeometric polynomial (1.1) is a solution of the following equation :

vxfn

xfxf

xfxf

xfxfdx

yd

xf

xfxf1

'1

'

"

'

13

2

2

2

2

2

dxdy

0 yxfn (1.3)

Several generating relations for hypergeometric polynomials have been derivedby different methods e.g. classical, theory of Lie-group etc. In a recent paper A.K.Chongdar [1] has derived some generating functions for the said polynomials byLie algebraic method. See also [2] and [3].

Page 18: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

14

Now, we can apply the group theoretic method on (1.3) by replacing

dxd

by x

, ,

' yyfyf

n

zzfzf

' and zfyfxfuy ,, in (1.2).

We get the following partial differential equation :

xzu

zfzf

xfxf

xyu

yfyf

xfxf

xu

xf

xfxf 2222

2

2

2

2

'''.

''

1

0'

1"'''" 3

222

xu

xf

xfxfxfxfxf

vxfxf

zyu

zfzf

yfyf

xf (1.4)

Thus zfyfxvnFzfyfxfu n;,,,, 121 is a solution of the differential

equation (1.3) since xfvnF ;,,12 is a solution of (1.3) we now defined the

infinitesimal operator 6,...,2,1iAi

6,...,2,1;0321

jAz

Ay

Ax

AA ijijijiji

as follows :

zzfzf

xxfzfxf

A

zvfzzfyyfzf

yfxfxxfzf

xfxfA

yvfzzf

zfyfxfyyf

yfxxf

yfxfxfA

yyfxxfyfxf

A

zzfzf

A

yyfyf

A

''

'1

''1

1'1

'

'

'

2

6

15

2

4

3

2

1

(1.5)

2. Application. Now, we study in details the case when xexf , then the

differential equation (1.3) can be rewritten as

011 2

2

wendxdw

vendx

wde xxx , (2.1)

where xevnFW ;;,12

Let xdxd

zyn

,, and , ,, zyx eeeuW

Page 19: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

15

Then from (1.3), we get

011222

2

2

xu

vzy

ue

xzu

exy

ue

xu

e xxxx(2.2)

which has the solution

aznyxzyx eeevnFeeeu ;;,,, 12 . (2.3)

So we define

zxeAvezeyexeeA

vezeyexeeAyxeA

zAyA

z

zzzxxz

yyxyyx

y

6

5

4

3

2

1

11 (2.4)

such that

112126

112125

12124

112123

12122

12121

;;1, ;;,

;;1, ;;,

;;,1 ;;,

;;,1 ;;,

;;, ;;,

;;, ;;,

nyxznyx

nyxznyx

znyxznyx

znxznyx

znyxznyx

znyxznyx

eevnFeevnFA

eevnFveevnFA

eevnFnveevnFA

eevnFneevnFA

eevnFeevnFA

eevnFneevnFA

. (2.5)

Now we have the following commutate or relations. Using the relation

,, uBAABuBA we get

;0,2,;,;0,

;0,;,;,0,;0,;0,;,0,;2,;0,;0,

61

26566251

63552441

645342331

541433221

AAvAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAVAAAAAAA

(2.6)

Hence we get the following theorem :Theorem. The set (I,Ai (i=1,2,...,6)) when I stands for the indentity operator,generates a Lie-algebra L and each of the sets

4,3,2,1, iAI i and 6,5,2,1, jAI j

forms a subalgebra of L.It can be easily shown that the partial differential operator L given by :

Page 20: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

16

x

vzy

exz

exy

ex

eL xxxx

11222

2

2

(2.7)

can be related to each Ai in the following two different ways, i.e.

2256

1134

1and1

AvAAALvAAAAL

. (2.8)

From which it follows that L commutes with each of the Ai

i.e. 6,...,2,1 0, iLAi . (2.9)

The extended form of the groups generated by 6,...,2,1iAi given by;

zyaxueeeue zyxAa ,,,, 111 (2.10)

zayxueeeue yyxAa 2,,,,22 (2.11)

zaeaexyueeeue 3yyyxAa ,In, In,, 3333 (2.12)

yyyxAa eaveeeue 41In,,44

xy

yyxy

4eea

eazeyeea1xu

11

1In, 1In, 1 In

4

44 (2.13)

xzz

zyyxAa eaeyxu

ae

eveeeue

1InIn,, 5

5

55

55

5 In, 1

In aeae

eaee z

z

xzy

(2.14)

zzyyxAa eazyeaxueeeue 66 1In,,1In,,66 (2.15)

Therefore we easily get

yyxAaAaAaAaAaAa eeeueeeeee ,,112233445566

pnueaaeaaaaezv yxyz ,,11In 544565 (2.16)

where

424442565

446

111

11In

aaeaaaaeaaae

eaeaeazyx

yxyz

yxyz

yxyz

yxzy

eaaeaaaae

aaeaaaaeaaaea

544565

4355653431

11

111

Page 21: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

17

yxyz

yxyz

eaeaeaeaaeaaaae

a

446

5445652 11

11.

3. Generating Functions. From (2.2) znyxzyx eevnFeeeu ;;, ,, 12 is

a solution of the systems :

0 0

; 0

0 ;

0 0

2121 unAALu

uALu

unALu

and from (2.9), we easily get

,0;;,;;, 1212 znyxznyx eeevnFLSeeevnFSL

where 112233445566 AaAaAaAaAaAa eeeeeeS .

Therefore the transformation znyx eevnFS ;;,12 is also annulled by L.

By putting a1=a2=0 in (2.16) and then using it, we get

znyxAaAaAaAa eevnFeeee ;;,1233445566

yxyzzyxyz eaeaeaeaaeaaaeanv 444544655 11In11In

435655343 111In aaeaaaeaeaaan yxzy

eaaaaaeaeaeaea

ev

nF

yzyxyz

x

243655446

121111;

;, In

zy

aaea zx

425 1

(3.1)

Again

aznyxAaAaAaAa evnFeeee ;;,1233445566

0 0 0 0

2456

!!!!In

p m l kk

k

l

l

m

m

p

p

nk

aknv

la

vm

am

pa

pmlknevpmlkn

F x

;;,

In 12 (3.2)

Page 22: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

18

Equating (3.1) and (3.2), so we have

yxyzzyxyz eaeaeaeaaeaaaeanv 442544655 11In11In

425655242 111In aaeaaaeaeaaan zxzy

243655446

121111;

;, In

eaaaaaeaeaeaea

ev

nF

yzyxyx

x

425 1 aaea zx

0 0 0 0

2456

!!!!p m l kk

k

l

l

m

m

p

p

nk

aknv

la

vm

am

pa

pmzkyevpmlkn

F x

1

;;,

In 12 (3.3)

The above generating function does not seen to appear before where from a largenumber of different generating relations (near and known) may be easily obtainedby attributing different values to ai's of which the generating relations.Derivation of some generating functions involving Jacobi polynomialsfrom the relation (2.19)Now putting .

,1 n ,1 v2

1 yx e

e

in (3.3) and then

Case 1. Letting ,0642 aaa 15 a , and te z 2 we get,

te

teePett y

yy

nny

11

11121 ,

0

, !

2

m

mxmnm

mtePn

m (3.4)

Case 2 : Putting 1,0 6542 aaaa , and tez , we obtain

0

,1 1!

11

1p

pypnp

y

nn tePn

ptte

Pt (3.5)

REFERENCES[1] A.K. Chongdar, Group study for certain generating functions. Cal. Math. Soc., 77 (1985), 151-157.

[2] E.B. Mc Bride, Obtainging Generating Functions. Springer Verlag, Berlin (1971).

[3] L. Weisner, Group theoretical origins of certain generating functions, Pacific J. Math., 5 (1955),1033-1039.

Page 23: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

UNSTEDAY INCOMPRESSIBLE MHD HEAT TRANSER FLOWTHROUGH A VARIABLE POROUS MEDIUM IN A HORIZONTALPOROUS CHANNEL UNDER SLIP BOUNDARY CONDITIONS

ByN.C.Jain

Department of Mathematics, University of Rajasthan Jaipur-302004 ,Rajasthan, india

andDinesh Kumar Vijay

Department of Mathematics, Kautilya Institute of Technology & EngineeringJaipur-302022 ,Rajasthan, india

E-mail:[email protected](Received : December 30, 2007)

ABSTRACTThe paper examines the problem of unsteady MHD flow and heat transfer

of a viscous incompressible fluid in slip flow regime with variable permeabilitybounded by two parallel porous plates. Using perturbation technique theexpressions are obtained for velocity and temperature distributions, skin frictionand Nusselt number. The Effects of slip parameters, Hartmann number, Reynoldsnumber, permeability parameter are discussed on velocity and temperaturedistributions. Important parameters, the skin friction and Nusselt number at boththe plates are also calculated.2000 Mathematics Subject Classification : Primary 76D, Secondary 76S05Keywords : Unsteady, Variable permeability, Slip parameters, MHD, PorousMedium, Heat source/sink.

1. Introduction. Fluid flow and heat transfer in porous media is animportant subject in hydrology. It is of vital interest in petrolium and chemicalengineerings. To study the underground water resources and seepage of water in adam, one needs to investigate the flows through a porous media. Flow in a channelis very fundamental problem and attracted the attention of many research workers.Schlichting and Gersten [10], Bansal [4] and some others have considered theproblem in their books. Considering magnetic effect Attia and Kolb [1], Yen andChang [15] and Singh [11] studied the flow between two parallel plates. Jain andBansal [5] considered temperature dependent viscosity in the Couette flow. Attia[2] studied hall current effects on the velocity and temperature fields of an unsteadyHartmann flow. Numerical solution of free convection MHD micropolar fluid flowbetween two parallel porous vertical plates is also discussed by Bhargava et al. [3].

Page 24: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

20

Pulsatile flow in a channel or in a tube has application in Biofluid flow inthe dialysis of blood in artificial kidneys. Sharma and Mishra [12] , Sarangi andSharma [14] and Sharma et al. [13] have solved the problems with time dependentpressure gradiant.

In geothermal region situation may arise when the flow becomes unsteadyand slip at the boundary may take place as well. At high altitude, the study of slipflow becomes very important. Kepping this in mind Soundlegekar and Arnake [9].Johri and Sharma [6], Jain [7] and Jothimani and Anjali Devi [8] considered theslip flow boundary conditions in their problems.

The aim of present paper is to investigate the MHD flow and heat transferof a viscous incompressible fluid in slip flow regime with variable permeabilitybounded by two parallel porous plates. It is found that the skin friction at both theplates increases with increase of slip parameter h1.

2. Formulation of the Problem. Let us consider the unsteadyincompressible MHD heat teransfer flow through a porous medium of variable

permeability nteKtK 10 in slip flow regime bounded by two infinite long

parallel thin porous plates. The parallel plates are placed at a distance h apart.Let x*-axis be taken along the direction of plates and y*-axis is taken in normaldirection to the plates.

The equations of continuity, motion and energy for unsteady flow of anincompressible viscous fluids are

nteAvvtv

10 0 ...(1)

nteK

uuB

y

uxp

yu

tv

10

202

2

...(2)

yp

tv

...(3)

sp TTQyu

yT

kyT

tT

C

2

2

2

...(4)

The boundary conditions are

::0

hyy

,1

,0

10 dydu

LeAuu

unt

dydT

LTT

TT

20

0

...(5)

where u, v are the components of velocity along x-axis and y-axis respectively, t thetime, v0 is the cross flow velocity, p the pressure, is the density, Cp the specfic

heat at constant pressure, k the thermal conductivity, the coefficient of viscocity,

Page 25: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

21

Q the volumetric rate of heat generation, T the fluid temperature, Ts the statictemperature, coefficient of the electrical conductivity, B0 the coefficient of

electromagnetic induction, here LLm

mL ,

2

1

11

being mean free path and m1

the Maxwell' s reflection coefficient.

A and n are real positive coefficients such that 1ANow introducing the following non-dimensional quantities

,*hx

x ,*hy

y ,*

uh

u ,* 2ht

t

,Prk

C p ,* 2

2

vph

p

,RevhVo ,* 2

0

hK

K ,0 s

s

TTTT

spc TTCh

vE

02

2

, ,2

pvCQh

,22

02

vhB

M

vnh

n2

* .

Equations (3) and (4) reduce to the following form after dropping theasterisks over them

ueAK

uMyu

xp

yu

eAtu

ntnt

11

1Re 22

2

...(6)

PrPr1RePrPr2

2

2

cnt E

yu

yyeA

t ...(7)

with corresponding boundary conditions

,1

0

10 dydu

heARu

unt

dyd

h

21

1

1 0

yatyat ...(8)

Here v

huR

hL

hhL

h 00

22

11 ,, .

3. Solution of the Problem. We assume

yeyyueAyuu

eAxp

nt

nt

nt

10

10

1

...(9)

Using equation (9) in the equations (6) and (7) and equating the coefficients of thesome powers of , we get the following set of ordinary differential equations after

neglecting the coefficients of 2o .

Page 26: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

22

1 1Re 02

00 uKMuu ...(10)

0012'

11 1Re1 1Re uKuunKMuu ...(11)

2'00

'0

''0 PrPrRePr uEc ...(12)

'1

'0

'011

'1

''1 Pr2RePrPrPrRePr uuEAn c ...(13)

with corresponding boundary conditions becomes

:1:0

yy

,,0

'0100

0

uhRuu

,,0

'1101

1

uhRuu

,1,1

'020

0

h

'121

1 0h ...(14)

Equations (10) to (13) are second order linear differential equations withconstant coefficients, the solution of which are

65443121214321 AeAeAeCeCeAAeCeCu ymymymymntymym ...(15)

ymymymymymym

ntymmymymymym

eAeAeAeAeCeC

eeAeAeAeCeC216587

212165

213

212111087

92

82

765

ymmymymmymmymm eAeAeAeAeA 21141312118

217161514

ymymmymmymm eAeAeAeA 2214232 2

22212019 ...(16)where

KMA 121

,

2

14ReRe 22

1

KMm

,

2

14ReRe 22

2

KMm

,11

1

1121

012111

12

2

mhemhe

RAmheAC mm

m

,11

11

1121

01112

12

1

mhemhe

RmheAC

mm

m

,2

4ReRe 12

3

Anm

,

2

4ReRe 12

4

Anm

, Re 1

112

KC

mCA

,Re 2223

KC

mCA ,Re 1121

24 Anmm

AA

,Re 1222

35 Anmm

AA

,

1

1

16 An

AA

,65443 AAACC

3141

65431215114604 11

11134

321

mhemheAAAmhemheAmheAAR

C mm

mmm

,

Page 27: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

23

,2

422

5

PrRePrPrRe

m ,2

422

6

PrRePrPrRe

m

,Re24 1

21

21

21

7

PrmPrm

CmPrEA c ,

Re24 222

22

22

8

PrmPrm

CmPrEA c

,

PrRePr

2

212

21

21219

mmmm

CCmmA ,1 98765 AAACC

,11

11221

5262

987529212

822

7126

56

52121

mhemhe

AAAmheeAmmeAmeAmhC mm

mmmmm

,

2422

7

nPrRePrPrRe

m

,2

422

8

nPrRePrPrRe

m

,

525

5510

nPrPrRemm

CPrReAmA

,

626

6611

nPrPrRemm

CPrReAmA

,

24

2

121

7112

nPrPrRemm

APrReAmA

,

24

2

222

8213

nPrPrRemm

APrReAmA

,21

221

21914

nPrmmPrRemm

mmPrReAAA

,

2

312

31

313115

nPrmmPrRemm

mmCCPrEA c

,

2

412

41

414116

nPrmmPrRemm

mmCCPrEA c

,

24

2

121

4211

17

nPrPrRemm

AmCPrEA c

,

2

212

21

215118

nPrmmPrRemm

mmACPrEA c

,

2

322

32

323219

nPrmmPrRemm

mmCCPrEA c

,

2

422

42

424220

nPrmmPrRemm

mmCCPrEA c

,

2

212

21

214221

nPrmmPrRemm

mmACPrEA c

,

24

2

222

2252

22

nPrPrRemm

mACPrEA c

, 2221201918171615141312111087 AAAAAAAAAAAAACC

2121651421

2132

21211161052 22 mmmmmm eAmmeAmeAmeAmeAmh

Page 28: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

24

21141311821

217116411531 2 mmmmmmm eAmmeAmeAmmeAmm

2214231 2222212120421931 2 mmmmmmm eAmeAmmeAmmeAmm

4131212165

1615142

132

121110mmmmmmmmmm eAeAeAeAeAeAeA

2214232211 22221201918

217

mmmmmmmmmm eAeAeAeAeAeA

,11

1

7282

22212019

18171615141312111072

87

7

mhemheAAAA

AAAAAAAAAmhe

C mm

m

s

4. Skin-Friction. The coefficient of skin friction at the lower plate is

0

0

yat

yf yu

C

10 '' ueAu nt

524144332211 AmAmCmCmeACmCm nt

The coefficient of skin friction at the lower plate is

1

1

yat

yf yu

C

214321524144332211

mmmmntmm eAmeAmeCmeCmeAeCmeCm

5. Nusselt Number. The rate of heat transfer in terms of Nusselt numberat the lower plate is

0

0

y

y yNu

105887792182716655 22 AmCmCmeAmmAmAmCmCm nt

164115311221132121116 22 AmmAmmAmmAmAmAm

2222121204219321821171 22 AmAmmAmmAmmAmmAm

The rate of heat transfer in terms of Nusselt number at the upper plate is

1

1

y

y yNu

ntmmmmmm eeAmmeAmeAmeCmeCm 212165921

282

2716652 22

Page 29: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

25

216587 2132

21211161058877 22 mmmmmm eAmeAmeAmeAmeCmeCm

413121164115311421

mmmmmm eAmmeAmmeAmm

121712 meAm 3221

19321821mmmm eAmmeAmm

422042

mmeAmm 221 22222121 2 mmm eAmeAmm .

6. Result and Discussion. In order to understand the solutions physically,we have calculated the numerical values of the velocity distributions [Figure 1.0],temperature distributions [Figure 2.0], skin friction [Figure 3.0 and Figure 4.0]and Nusselt number [Figure 5.0 and Figure 6.0] for different values of h1 (slipparameter), h2 (temperature jump), M (Magnetic parameter), Re (Reynolds number),(volumetric rate of heat generation) and K (Permeability parameter).

In Figure 1.0, the velocity distribution (u) is plotted against y. It is beingobserved that velocity increases with the increase in h1, Re and Ro but decreaseswith increase in M and K. It is also observed that increase in velocity with theincrease in injection parameter takes place for both the cases slip flow or no slipflow.

In Figure 2.0, temperature distribution () is plotted against y. It is beingseen that temperature increases as M, K, Pr and increase but phenomena reversesfor the case of h1, h2 and Ro. It is interesting to note that for the case of Pr=7.0(water as a fluid), the temperature first increases and after some channel width itdecreases asymptotically, while for the case of Pr=0.71 (air as a fluid) thetemperature decreases continuously.

Skin friction which is plotted in Figures 3.0 and 4.0 against K is having aworth noting observation. It is being observed that skin friction at lower plate

0yfC increases with the increase in Re and h1 but decreases with the increase in

M and t while skin friction at the upper plate 1yfC increases with increase in M

and h1 but decreases with the increase in Re and t. Moreover, increase in K has

very small increasing effect on 0yfC but increase in K decreases

1yfC sharply

for lower values of K than for higher values.Nusselt number at the lower and upper plates are plotted against t in Figures

5.0 and 6.0 respectively. From the figures it is observed that Nusselt number atboth the plates increases with the increase in and K. Moreover, Nusselt number(Nu) at the lower plate remains positive for Pr=7.0 but for the Pr=0.71 it isnegative. As expected Nusselt number decreases for sink tha source at both theplates.

Page 30: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

26

Page 31: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

27

Page 32: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

28

Page 33: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

29

Page 34: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

30

Page 35: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

31

Page 36: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

32

REFERENCES[1] H.A. Attia and N.A. Kotb, MHD flow between two parallel plates with heat transfer, Acta Mech,

117 (1996) 215-220.

[2] H.A. Attia, Hall current effects on the velocity and temperature fields of an unsteady Hartmannflow, Candian Jounral of Physics., (1998), 739-746.

[3] R. Bhargava, L. Kumar and H.S. Takhar, Numerical solution of free convection MHD micropolarfluid flow between two parallel porous vertical plates, International Journal of EngineeringScience, 41(2) (2003), 123-136.

[4] J.L. Bansal, Viscous Fluid Dynamics, OXFORD and IBH publishing company (2004).

[5] N.C. Jain and J.L. Bansal, Couette flow with transpiration cooling when the viscosity of the fluiddepends on temperature, Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci., 77(A)(4) (1973), 184-200.

[6] A.K. Johri and J.S. Sharma, MHD fluctuating flow of Maxwell viscoelastic fluid past a porous platein slip flow regime, Acta Cinecia Indica, 5 (1979), 101.

[7] N.C. Jain, Viscoelastic flow past an infinite plate in slip flow regime with constant heat flux, TheMathematics Education, 24 (1990), p.3.

[8] S. Jothimani and S.P. Anjali Devi, MHD Couette flow with heat and slip flow effects in an inclinedchannel, Indian J. Math., 43(1), (2001), 47

[9] V.M. Soundalgekur and R.N. Arnake, free convection effects on the oscillation flow of an electricallyconducting rarefied gas over an infinite vertical plate with constant suction, Appl. Sce. Res., 34(1978), 49.

[10] H. Schlichting, K. Gersten, Boundary Layer Theory, Springer Verlage Berlin (1999).

[11] K.D. Singh, An oscillatory hydromagnetic coquette flow in rotating system, ZAMP, 80 (2000),429-432.

[12] P.R. Sharma and U. Mishra, Pulsatile MHD flow and heat transfer through a porous channel, Bull.Pure and Appl. Sciences, 21E(1), (2002), 93-100.

[13] P.R. Sharma, R.P. Sharma, U. Mishra and N. Kumar, Unsteady flow and heat transfer of a viscousincompressible fluid between parallel porous plates with heat source/sink, Applied SciencePeriodical, 6 (2) (2004).

[14] K.C. Sarangi, V.K. Sharma, Unsteady MHD flow and heat transfer of a viscous incompressible,fluid through a porous medium of variable permeability bounded by two parallel porous plateswith heat source/sink, Ganita Sandesh, 19(2) (2005), 179-188.

[15] J.T. Yen and C.C. Chang, Magneto hydrodynamics Couette flow as affected by wall electricalcondition, ZAMP, 15 (1964), 400-407.

Page 37: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

33

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

REDUCIBILITY OF THE QUARDUPLE HYPERGEOMETRICFUNCTIONS OF EXTON

ByB. Khan

Department of Basic SciencesHamelmalo Agricultural College, Keran P.O. Box 397, Eritrea.

e-mail : [email protected]

M. KamarujjamaDepartment of Mathematics

Yanbu University College, Royal Commission of Yanbu, P.O. Box 31387, YanbuAl-Sinayah Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

e-mail:[email protected]

Nassem A. KhanDepartment of Applied Mathematics, Z.H. College of Engineering and

Technology, Aligarh Muslim University, Aligarh-202002, Indiae-mail:[email protected]

(Received : February 05, 2008)

ABSTRACTSome reducible cases of the quadruple hypergeometric functions K1,K2 and

K3 of Exton are obtained. Our main results transform a quardruple function intoKampé de Fériet's double or Srivastava's triple hypergeometric F(3) functions ortheir combinations. Many reduction formulae involving Saran's functions EE, EF

Lauricella's function 3CF , Kampé de Fériet's function ,::

;:rqp

tsF generalized

hypergeometric series qp F and Appell's function F4 are obtained. It is shown that

Exton's result [7] and [8] are not correct. These results in their correct forms areobtained as special cases of our main reduction formulae.2000 Mathematics Subject Classification : 33C70.Keywords : Generalized hypergeometric functions, Kmapé de Fériet's & Appell'sfunctions, Quadruple hypergeometric functions, and Lauricella's function.

1. Introduction. In the year 1972, Exton [6]] defined and examined a fewproperties of quadruple hypergeometric functions. In his notations K1, K2 and K3are given by [8;p.78]

Page 38: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

34

0,,,

1 !!!!,,,;,,,;,,,;,,,

qpnm pnqm

qpnmqpnmqpnm

qpnmfed

tzyxcbatzyxdfedcbbbaaaaK (1.1)

0,,,

2 !!!!,,,;,,,;,,,;,,,

qpnm qpnm

qpnmqpnmqpnm

qpnmgfed

tzyxcbatzyxgfedcbbbaaaaK (1.2)

and

0,,,

3 !!!!,,,;,,,;,,,;,,,

qpnm pnqm

qpnmqpnmqpnm

qpnmed

tzyxcbatzyxdeedccbbaaaaK (1.3)

respectively, where

.a

kaa k

The convergence of the series K1, K2 and K3 are investigated by Exton, by mean ofthe general theory obtained in [8, p. 65(2.9)].

In this paper, various reducible cases of the functions K1, K2 and K3 areobtained. Our results transform a function of four variables into a double or tripleseries or their combinations. The main insterst of the result obtained in Section 2

is that the series of Lauricella's 3CF is tranformed into a combinations of Kampé

de Fériet's functions. In Section 3 a reduction of FE in terms of generalized

hypergeometric series 34 F is given. In Section 4 a reduction of K3 into a

combination of four F(3)'s is obtained which further gives a transformation ofSaran's FF into a combination of two Kampé de Fériet's functions.

In a paper of Exton [7, p. 66(3.2)], the reduction formula for Saran's functionFE [11] is given in the form

,4,;;1,,;,,:2

1,

2,;,,:,,;,,;,,;,,

32322

3232213:3:1

3,3:0321221

yx

ccccBAb

ccccbBAbaFyyxcccbbbaaaFE (1.4)

where as in a recent book of Exton [8, p.134 (4.7.8)], the reduction of FE is given by

,4,;;1,,;,,;2

1,

2,;,,:,,;,,;,,;,,

32312

3232213;3:1

3;3:0321221

yx

ccccBAb

ccccbBAbaFyyxcccbbbaaaFE (1.5)

where 3;3:13;3:0F is Kampé de Fériet's function in contracted notation of Burchnall and

Chaundy [2;p. 112-113]. In equation (1.4) and (1.5), A, and B are arbitrary

Page 39: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

35

parameters in which numerator parameters are cancelled by denominatorparameters A and B.

It is to be noted that (1.4) and (1.5) are incorrect. In fact, their correct formis obtained in Section 2 and follows as a special case of our reduction formula ofK1.

2. Reducibility of K1-Function. From (1.1), we have

0,

1 !!,,,;,,,;,,,;,,,

qm qm

qmqmqm

qmd

txcbatzyxdfedcbbbaaaaK

zyfembqmaF ,;,;;4 , (2.1)

where F4 is Appell's function of fourth kind [1,p.14(14)].Putting z=y in (2.1) and using a result of Burchnall [3; p.101 (37)], we get

0,

1 !!,,,;,,,;,,,;,,,

qm qm

qmqmqm

qmd

txcbatyyxdfedcbbbaaaaK

y

fefe

fefembqmaF 4

; 1,,

;2

1,

2,,

34 , (2.2)

where 4F3 is generalized hypergeometric function [10; p. 73(2)]. Now expressing

4F3 in power series form and interpreting the result in the form of Srivastavafunction F(3) [12; p.428], we get

tyx

fefed

cfefe

baFtyyxdfedcbbbaaaaK ,4,; ;1,,; :; ; ::

;;2

1,

2; : ; ;::,,,;,,,;,,,;,,, 3

1 (2.3)

when t=0 or c=0, (2.3) reduces to

,4,;1,,;:–

;2

1,

2–;:,,,;,,; 2;0:2

3;1:03

yx

fefed

fefebaFyyxfebaFC (2.4)

where 3CF and 2;0:2

3;1:0F are Lauricella [9,p.114] and Kampé de Fériet [14;p.23 (1.2)]

functions, respectively.When x=0 in (2.3), we get the following correct form of the reduction formula (1.4)and (1.5) of Exton [8,p. 134 (4.7.8)], for Saran's function FE [11].

yt

feedBA

fefebCBAaFyytfedbbcaaaFE 4,

;1,;,,:

;2

1,

2,;,,:,,;,,;,,;,, 3;3:1

3,3:0 . (2.5)

Page 40: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

36

Setting f=e, z=–y and t=x in (2.1) and using a result of Srivastava [13; p.296 (9)].we get

0,1 !!

a,,,;,,,;,,,;,,,

qm qm

qmqmqm

qmd

xcbxyyxdeedcbbbaaaaK

.4;,,4 2;2

1,

2

21

,2

1

2

,2

3

yFmbmb

e

qma

e

qma

e ...(2.6)

Now expressing 4F3 in power series form and using a result [10;p. 22(lemma 5)],we get

xyyxdeedcbbbaaaaK ,,,;,,,;,,,;,,,1

0

12

222 ,;;,2;2

!n nn

nnn xxdcnbnaF

neeyba

, ...(2.7)

where F1 is Appell's function of first kind [1;p. 14 (11)].Again, using a result [5; p. 239(11) for F1 in (2.7), and a result of Carlson [4;

p. 234(10)] for the resulting Gauss function 2F1 [10, p. 45 (1), we get the followingreduction of K1 into a combination of two Kampé de Fériet's functions.

xyyxdeedcbbbaaaaK ,,,;,,,;,,,;,,,1

d

xcbayxcbcbee

edd

bbcbcaaa

F

222,0:45,3:0 4,

;2

1,

2,

21

,2

,;2

1,

2,

21

:

;2

1,

2;:

21

,2

,2

1,

2

.4,;

21

,2

,2

1,

2,;

22

;2

1,,

23

:

;2

1,

2;:

22

,2

1,

22

,2

1222,0:4

5,3:0

yxcbcbeee

dd

bbcbcbaa

F...(2.8)

when c=0 in (2.8), we get

yyxeedbaFC ,,;,,;;3

dabx

yxeee

dd

bbaa

F

220,0:43,3:0 4,

;2

1,

2,;

21

,2

,21

:

;;:2

1,

2,

21

,2

Page 41: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

37

.4,;

21

,2

,;2

2;

21

,23

:

;;:2

2,

21

,2

2,

21

220,0:43,3:0

yxeee

dd

bbaa

F...(2.9)

3. Reducibility of K2 Function. Writing (1.2) in the form

0,

2 !!

a,,,;,,,;,,,;,,,

qp qp

qpqpqp

qpgf

tzcbtzyxgfedcbbbaaaaK

yxedpbqpaF ,;,;;4 . ...(3.1)

Putting y=x in (3.1) and using [3; p. 101(37)], we get

tzxxgfedcbbbaaaaK ,,,;,,,;,,,;,,,2

. ,,4;;,1,,:;;::

;;,2

1,

2:;;::3

tzxgfeded

ceded

baF ...(3.2)

Setting. z=–x and f=d in (3.1) and using a result of Srivastava [13; p. 296 (9)], weget

0,

2 !!

a,,,;,,,;,,,;,,,

qn qn

qnqmqn

qnge

tycbtxyxgdedcbbbaaaaK

.4; 2;2

1,2

;2

1

,2

1

, 2

,2, 34

xFnbnb

d

qna

d

qna

d ...(3.3)

Now expanding 4F3 into series form and using [10; p. 22 (Lemma 5)], we get

txyxgdedcbbbaaaaK ,,,;,,,;,,,;,,,2

,,;,;,2;2

! 20 2

222 tygecmbmaF

mddxba

m mm

mmm

...(3.4)

where F2 is Appell's function of second kind [1; p. 14(12)]. Putting g=c in (3.4),making use of a result [5;p.238(2)] together with a result of Carlson [4;p.234 (10)],we get

txyxcdedcbbbaaaaK ,,,;,,,;,,,;,,,2

Page 42: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

38

22

0,0:43,3:0 1

,12

;2

1,

2,

21

;2

1,

2,:

;;:2

1,

2,

21

,21

ty

tx

eee

ddd

bbaa

Ft a

.

1,

12

;2

2,

21

,23

;2

1,

2,:

;;:2

2,

21

,2

2,

21

1

220,0:4

3,3:01

ty

tx

eeddd

bbaa

Fte

abya ...(3.5)

When y=0, (3.5) yields a reduction FE into 4F3 in the form

xxtddcbbcaaaFE ,,;,,,,,;,, .1

4

;2

1,

2,

:2

1,

2;

21

,21

2

34

tx

ddd

bbaa

Ft a ...(3.6)

4. Reducibility of K3- Function. Expressing (1.3) in the form

tzyxdeedccbbaaaaK ,,,;,,,;,,,;,,,3

0,

1 .,;,;;!!qm qm

qmqmqm zyeqcmbqmaFqmd

txcba...(4.1)

Putting z= y in (4.1) and using [5; p. 239 (11)], we get a reduction formula of K3intoF(3)in the form

tyyxdeedccbbaaaaK ,,,;,,,;,,,;,,,3 .,,

;;:,;;::;;;:;;::,3

tyx

ecbdcbcba

F ...(4.2)

When t=0, (4.2) reduces to

yyxeedbcbaaaFF ,,;,,;,,;,, , ,;:,,:

;;;,0;1:21;2:0

yx

ecbdbcba

F ...(4.3)

where FF is another Saran's function[11].Furthermore for d=b,(4.3) reduces to a reduction formula of FF into F4 in

the form

. ,;,;;,,;,,;,,;,, 4 yxccbcbaFyyxeebbcbaaaFF ...(4.4)

Again, writing

xzyxcbaeecbaccbbaaaaK ,,,,1,,,1;,,,;,,,3

Page 43: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

39

0,

1 , ,;1,;;!!pn pn

pnpnpn xxcbapcnbpnaFpne

zycba...(4.5)

and making use of [5, p. 239(11)] and Goursat's quadratic transformation [5, p.113(34)], we have

xzyxcbaeecbaccbbaaaaK ,,,,1,,,1;,,,;,,,3

0,

212 .1

4

;1

;2

1,

2!!111

pn pn

pn

pnpna

x

x

cba

pnapnaF

pnex

zx

ycba

x

(4.6)Now using a double series identity of Srivastava [15; p. 196 (23)]

0, 0,0,

2,122,2,pn pnpn

pnApnApnA

0,0,

12,1212,2pnpn

pnApnA ...(4.7)

in (4.6), we get a reduction of K3 in terms of combination of four F(3)'s in the form

xzyxcbaeecbaccbbaaaaK ,,,;1,,,1;,,,;,,,3

22

23

1,

1,

1

4

;21

;21

;1:;2

1,

2;::

;2

1;

2;

21

,2

;:;;::2

1,

21x

zx

y

x

x

cbaee

ccbbaa

Fx a

22

23

1 1,

11

4

;21

;23

;1:;2

2,

21

;::

;2

1;

2;

22

,2

1;:;;::

22

,2

1

1 xz

xy

x

x

cbaee

ccbbaa

Fxe

abya

22

23

1 1,

11

4

;23

;21

;1:;2

2,

21

;::

;2

2;

21

;2

1,

2;:;;::

22

,2

1

1 xz

xy

x

x

cbaee

ccbbaa

Fxe

acza

22

23

2 1,

11

4

;23

;23

;1:;2

3,

22

;::

;2

2;

21

;2

2;

21

;:;;::2

3,

22

11

1x

zx

y

x

x

cbaee

ccbbaa

Fxee

bcyzaaa

...(4.8)When y=0 in (4.8), we get a reduction for Saran function FF involving thecombination of the two Kampé de Fériet's functions

Page 44: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

40

xxzcbacbacbcaaaFF ,,;1,1;,,;,,

2

22,0:2

3,1:0 1,

1

4

21

,2

;21

;1:

;2

1;

2;:

21

,21

xz

x

xee

cba

ccaa

Fx a

.

1,

1

4

22

,2

1;

23

;1:

;2

1;

2;:

22

,2

1

1

2

22,0:2

3,1:01

xz

x

xee

cba

ccaa

Fxe

acza ...(4.9)

REFERENCES[1] P. Appell, et J. Kampé de Fériet, Fonctions Hypergeometriques et Hyperspheriques. Polinomes

d'Hermite, Gauthier-Villars, Paris, 1926.[2] J.L. Burchnall and T.W. Chaundy, Expansions of Appell's double hypergeometric function (II),

Quart. J. Math., 12 (Oxford series) (1941), 112-128.[3] J.L. Burchnall, Differential equations associated with hypergeometric functions, Quat. J. Math.,

(Oxford series), 13 (1942), 90-106.[4] B.C.Carlson, Some extensions of Lardner's relations between 0F3 and Bessel function, SLAM J.

Math. Anal., 1(2) (1970), 232-242.[5] A. Erdélyi, et al., Higher Transcendental functions, Vol.1 McGraw-Hill, New York (1953).[6] H. Exton, Certain hypergeometric functions of four variables, Bull. Greek Math. Soc. N.S., 13

(1972), 104-113.[7] H. Exton, On the reducibility of the triple hypergeometric functions FE, FG and HB, Indian J.

Math., 18(2) (1976), 63-69.[8] H. Exton, Multiple Hypergeometric Functions and Applications, Ellis Horwaood Limited,

Chichester (1976).[9] G. Lauicella , Sulle Funzioni Ipergeometriche a piú variabili, Rend. Circ. Mat. Palermo, 7

(1893), 111-158.[10] E. D. Rainville, Special Functions, The Macmilan Comp., New York , 1960, Reprinted Chelsea

Publ. Co. Bronx., New Yrok, 1971.[11] S. Saran, Hypergeometric functions of three variables, Ganita, 5 (1954), 77-91.[12] H. M. Srivastava, Generalized Neumann expansions involving hypergeometric functions, Proc.

Camb. Philos. Soc., 63(1-2) (1967), 425-429.[13] H.M. Srivastava, On the reducibility of Appell's function F4, Canad. Math. Bull., 16(2) (1973),

295-298.[14] H.M. Srivastava and M.A. Pathan, Some bilateral generating functions for the extended jacobi

polynomials-I, Comment. Math. Univ. St. Pauli., 28(1) (1979), 23-30.[15] H.M. Srivastava, A note on certain identities involving generalized hypergeometric Series, Nederal.

Akad. Wetersch. Proc. Ser. A. 82(2)=Indag. Math., 41(2) (1979), 191-201.

Page 45: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

CONVERGENCE RESULT OF (L,) UNIFORM LIPSCHITZASYMPTOTICALLY QUASI NONEXPANSIVE MAPPINGS IN

UNIFORMLY CONVEX BANACH SPACEBy

G.S. SalujaDepartment of Mathematics and I.T.

Government College of Science, Raipur-4920101, ChhattisgarhE-mail : [email protected]

(Received : February 25, 2008)

ABSTRACTIn this paper, we have proved common fixed point of the modified Ishikawa

iterative sequences with errors for two (L,) uniform Lipschitz asymptoticallyquasi nonexpansive mappings in a unifromly convex Banach space. Our resultextends and improves the corresponding result of Khan and Takahashi [1], Tanand Xu [5] and many others.2000 Mathematics Subject Classification : 47H10.Keywords : Asymptotically quasi nonexpansive mapping, common fixed point,(L,) uniform Lipschitz mapping, the modified Ishikawa iteration scheme witherrors, uniformly convex Banach space.

1. Introduction and Preliminaries. Let C be a subset of a normed spaceE, and let T be a self mapping of C. The mapping T is said to be an asymptotically

nonexpansive mapping, if there exists a sequence {kn} in [0,) with 0lim

nn

k

such that

yxkyTxT nnn 1

for all Cyx , and 1n .

The mapping T is said to be an asymptotically quasi nonexpansive mapping,

if there exists a sequence {kn} in [0,) with 0lim

nn

k and F(T) such that

pxkpxT nn 1

for all Cyx , , for all TFp and 1n .

It there are constant L>0 and >0, such that

yxLyTxT nn

Page 46: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

42

for all x,yC and nN, then T is (L,) uniform Lipschitz.In 1994, Tan and Xu [5] had proved the problem on convergence of Ishikawa

iteration for asymtotically nonexpansive mapping on a compact convex subset ofa uniformly convex Banach space. In 2001, Qihou [2], presents the necessary andsufficient conditions for the Ishikawa iteration of asymptotically quasi-nonexpansive mapping with an error member on a Banach space converging to afixed point. Again in 2002, the same author has proved the convergence of Ishikawaiteration of a (L,) unifrom Lischitz asymptotically quasi nonexpansive mappingwith an error member on a compact convex subset of a uniformly convex Banachspace based on some results of [2].

Recently, Khan and Takahashi [1] considered the problems of approximatingcommon fixed point of two asymptotically nonexpansive self mappings S and T ofC through weak and strong convergence of the iterative sequence {xn} defined by

Cx 1

1 ,11 nySaxax nn

nnnn

1 ,1 nxTbxby nn

nnnn (A)

where {an} and {bn} are some sequences in [0,1].Motivated and inspired by Khan and Takahashi [1] and others we study the

following iteration scheme: Let C be a nonempty subset of a Banach space E andS,T:CC be two asymptotically quasi nonexpansive mappings. Consider thefollowing iterative sequence {xn} with errors defined by

Cx 0

,1 nnnn

nnnn ucySbxax

,nnnn

nnnn vcxTbxay (B)

where ,, Cvu nn ,1,,,,0, nnnnnn cbacbaCn ,1 nnnnnn cbacba for

all

11. ,,

n nn n ccNn

In this paper, we have proved convergence of common fixed point of modifiedIshikawa iteration scheme with errors of (L,) uniform Lipschitz asymptoticallyquasi nonexpansive mappings on a compact convex subset of a uniformly convexBanach space. Our result extends and improves the corresponding result of Tanand Xu [5], Khan and Takahashi [1] and many others.

We need to following result and lemmas to prove our main result:Theorem LQ [2, Theorem 3]: Let E be a nonempty closed convex subset of a

Page 47: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

43

Banach space, T is an asymptotically quasi-nonexpansive mapping on E, and F(T)

nonempty. Given 1

,n nu Ex 1 , defined 1nnx as

,1 nnnn

nnnn mcyTbxax

,, NnlcxTbxay nnnn

nnnn

where mn, lnE, and , 1nnm 1 nnl are bounded, nnnn acba 1

.1,,,,,0, nnnnnnnn cbacbacb Then 1 nnx converges to some fixed point p of

T if and only if there exists some infinite subsequence 1 knkx of

1 nnx which

converges to p.Lemma 1.1 [J.Schu's Lemma]: Let X be a uniformly convex Banach space,

,10 nt ,, Xyx nn ,suplim axnn

,suplim aynn

and

,1lim aytxt nnnnn

0a . Then 0lim

nn

nyx .

Lemma 1.2 [2, Lemma 2] : Let nonnegative series ,1nna ,1

nn 1nn satisfy

,1 nnnn ,Nn and 1

,n n

1

;n n then n

n

lim exits.

Lemma 1.3: Let C be a nonempty convex subset of normed space E, S,T: CC are

two asymptotically quasi nonexpansive mappings, and F=F(S)F(T) nonempty,

1 ,n nk for all Cx 0 , let

,1 nnnn

nnnn ucySbxax

,nnnn

nnnn vcxTbxay

where ,1,,,,,0,,, nnnnnnnn cbacbaCnCvu nnnnn bacba 1

,nc for all

11 .,, n nn n ccNn Then

(a) ,,,1 21 TFSFFpNnmpxkpx nnnn

where pucpvckbm nnnnnnn 1 .

Page 48: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

44

(b) There exists a constant M>0 such that pxMpx nmn

1,,,

mn

nkk TFSFFpNmnmM .

Proof of (a) For any pF, we have from (B)

pxn 1 pucpySbpxa nnnn

nnn

pucpykbpxa nnnnnnn 1 (1)

and

pyn pucpxTbpxa nnnn

nnn

pvcpxkbpxa nnnnnnn 1

pvcpxkba nnnnnn 1 (2)

From (1) and (2), we have

pxn 1 pucpvcpxkbakbpxa nnnnnnnnnnnn 11

pxkbbpxakbpxa nnnnnnnnnn 211

pucpvkcb nnnnnn 1

nnnnnnnnn capxakcapxa 111

nnnn mpxkb 21

nnnnn mpxkbapnxnanknapnxna 21111

nnnnnnnnnnn mpxkbapxakapxa 22 1111

nnnnnnnnn mpxbakapxka 22 111

nnnnnnn mpxkapxka 22 111

nnn mpxk 21

where pucpvkcbm nnnnnnn 1 .

Page 49: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

45

Proof of (b) Since xex 1 for all 0x . Therefore from (a) it can be obtained

that

px mn 112

11 mnmnmn mpxu

112 1

mnmn

u mpxe mn

12121 22

2

mnmnmnmnmn mmumn

uu epxe

122

22 121

mnmnu

mnuu mmepxe mnmnmn

... ... ...

1

2211 mn

nkk

un

u mepxemn

nk kmn

nk k

1mn

nkkn mmpxM

where

nk kueM 2 .

This completes the proof of (b).2. Main Result.

Theorem 2.1 : Let C be a nonempty compact subset of uniformly convex Banachspace X, and S,T:CC be two (L,) uniform Lipschitz asymptotically quasi

nonexpansive mappings with sequence {kn}[0,) such that 1n nk . Let

Cx 0

, and

,1 nnnn

nnnn ucySbxax

nnnn

nnnn vcxTbxay ,

where ,1,,,,,0,,, nnnnnnnn cbacbaCnCvu ,1 nnnnnn cbacba

Nnbbaaa nnnn ,1,10,0,10 , ,0lim

nn

b

1

,n nc

1n nc . If TFSFF . Then

1 nnx converges to some

common fixed point p of S and T.Proof. For any pF, we have from Lemma 1.3(a)

Page 50: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

46

nnnn mpxkpx 2

1 1 ,

where .1 pucpvkcbm nnnnnnn Since 1 ,n nk

1 ,n nc

1

,n nc C is bounded, thus we know from Lemma 1.2 that pxn

n

lim exists.

On the other hand, we have

pyn pvcpxTbpxa nnnn

nnn

pvcpxkbpxa nnnnnnn 1

Thus

.limsuplimsuplim pxpxpy nn

nn

nn

Note that

.lim1suplimsuplim pxpykpyS nn

nn

nnn

n

and

pxnn

1lim pucySbxa nnnn

nnnn

lim

pu

bc

pySbpuac

pxa nn

mn

nnn

n

nnn

n 22lim

pxnn

lim .

Thus from J. Schu's Lemma, we have

022

lim

pu

bc

ac

ySx nn

n

n

nn

nn

n .

Note that 022

lim

pu

bc

ac

nn

n

n

n

n.

Therefore we have

0lim

nn

nn

ySx . (3)

Page 51: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

47

Since C is compact, the sequence 1 nnx has a convergent subsequence 1 knk

x .

Let

.lim pxkn

k

...(4)

Thus from (3) and 0lim

nn

c , we have

kk nn xx 1 kkkk

k

kkk nnnnn

nnn xucySbxa

kkkk

k

kkkk nnnnn

nnnn xucySbxcb 1

0kkkkk

k

k nnnnnn

n xucxySb as k . (5)

Note that

;0lim,0lim

nn

nn

cb

therefore, we have

nn xy nnnnn

nnn xvcxTbxa

nnnnn

nnnn xvcxTbxcb 1

0 nnnnnn

n xvcxxTb as n (6)

Thus from (3) and (4), we have

.lim pySk

kn

n

k

(7)

Thus pxkn

k

1lim . Similary, px

knk

2lim and

.lim 11 pyS

k

kn

n

k

(8)

Now

0 nn

nnnnn

n yTyxyyTx as n . (9)

Therefore from (4) and (9), we have

.lim pyTk

kn

n

k

(10)

Page 52: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

48

Thus pxkn

k

1lim and since px

knk

2lim so

pyTk

kn

n

k

1

1lim (11)

From (3) – (8), we have

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

k

kn

nn

nn

nn

nn

n xSxSxSySySpSpp 11

11

11

11

1

Pnn

nn

nn SySySxS

k

k

k

k

k

k 111

kkkkkkk

knnnnnnn

n yxLxxLxyLySp 11111

0

pySLk

kn

n as k

Similarly we can show that

0Tpp as k .

Thus p is a common fixed point of S and T. Since the subsequence 1knk

x of 1nnx

converges to p from (4), we have TFSFFpxnn

lim from Theorem LQ.

This completes the proof.Remark 2.2 . Theorem 2.1 improves and extends the corresponding result of Khanand Takahashi [1] in several aspects.Remark 2.3 . Theorem 2.1 also extends the corresponding result of Tan and Xu[5] to the case of more general class of asymptotically nonexpansive mappings.Remark 2.4 . Theorem 2.1 also generalizes the result of Qihou [3].

REFERENCES[1] S.H. Khan and W. Takahashi, Approximating common fixed points of two asymptotically

nonexpansive mappings, Sci. Math. Jpn., 53 (2001), 143-148.[2] L. Qihou, Iterative sequences for asymptotically quasi-nonexpansive mapping with error member,

J. Math. Anal. Appl., 259 (2001), 18-24.[3] L. Qihou, Iterative sequences for asymptotically quasi-nonexpansive mapping with an error

member of uniformly covex Banach space, J. Math. Anal. Appl. 266 (2002), 468-471.[4] J. Schu, Iterative construction of fixed points of strictly quasicontractive mappings, Appl. Anal.

40 (1991), 67-72.[5] K.K. Tan and H.K. Xu, Fixed point iteration processes for asymptotically non-expansive mappings,

Proc. Amer. Math. Sco., 122 (1994), 733-739.

Page 53: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

ON SPECIAL UNION AND HYPERASYMPTOTIC CURVES OF AKAEHLERIAN HYPERSURFACE

ByA. K. Singh and A.K. Gahlot

Department of Mathematics, H.N.B. Garhwal UniversityCampus Badshahi Thaul, Tehri Garhwal-249199, Uttarakhand

(Received : December 25, 2007, September 2, 2008)

ABSTRACTSpecial, union and hypersymptotic curves of a Riemannian hypersurface

have been studied by Singh [3]. The object of this paper is to investigate thesecurves in a Kaehlerian hypersurface.2000 Mathematics Subject Classification : Primary 55H38; Secondary 58H32Keywords: Hypersymptotic curves, Riemannian hypersurface, Kaehlerianhypersurface.

1. Introduction. In an (n+1) dimensional real space Rn+1 referred to anallowable co-ordinate system,

,,...,, 121 na xxxx

Let us introduce the metric defined by the positive Hermitian form

.22 dxdxgds ...(1.1)

If the tensor g also satisfies the Kaehler's condition

,

xg

x

g akk ...(1.2)

then the space with metric satisfying the condition (1.2) is called Kaehler space.We always assume the self adjointness of the indices [2].

The angle between two self adjoint vector u and v , whose components

are S and S is given by

.cosRS

Srg ...(1.3)

Let us consider an analytic hypersurface Kn of Kn+1.If ui (u1,u2,...,un) denote the co-ordinates of a point in Kn, the equations of theanalytic hypersurface Kn may be written in the form

iuxx ...(1.4)

Page 54: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

50

We qnote below some fundamental formulae form [4] which will be used inthe later part of this paper. Suppose that gij is the fundamental metric tensor ofKn, then we have

, jiij BBgg ...(1.5)

where jjii ux

Bux

B

,

If N be the component of unit normal vector to the hypersurface, then

12 NNg ...(1.6)

and ;0 jBNg 0

jBNg ...(1.7)

The unit vector orthogonal to ds

dx is given by

0

dsdx

g ...(1.8)

and .12 g ...(1.9)

Consider a curve sxxC : of Kn.

The components ds

dx and

dsdui

of the unit tangent vector of real space,

w.r.t. the enveloping space and the hypersurface are related by

dsdu

Bds

dx i

i

...(1.10)

If q and Pi are the components of the first curvature vector w.r.t. Kn+1 and Kn

respectively, then

, NKBpq nii ...(1.11)

where nK is the component of the normal curvature of Kn in the direction of the

curve C and

dsdu

dsdu

dsdu

pds

dxds

duds

dxq

ijii

j

,;, ...(1.12)

dsdu

dsdu

KNBji

ijniji ,

Page 55: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

51

ij are the components of the second fundamental tensors of the

hypersurface, q and pi are the components of first curvature vector of the curve

with respect Kn+1 and Kn respectively2. Special and Union Curves in Kn. Let an n-dimensional hypersurface

Kn given by equation

ninxyy i ,...,2,1,1...,2,1;

be immersed in a Kaehlerian space Kn+1.The first two Frenet's formulae of a curve xi=xi (S) are given by

11

0 ks

nand

,22011

kk

s

n ...(2.1)

where

210 ,,

dsdy

are components of the unit tangent, principal normal

and first binormal vector and k(1) and k(2) are the first and second curvatures of

the curves. The components q and pi of the first curvature vector w.r.t. Kn+1 and

Kn are related by

, NKBpq nii ...(2.2)

where, iidxdy

B

, N are the components of unit normal vector and nK is the

normal curvature of the hypersurface in the direction of the curve.

Consider two congruence of the curve given by the unit ventor field and

which are such that the point of Kn, we have

CNBr ii ...(2.3a)

and . DNBs ii ...(2.3b)

The special K and union curves relative to have been defined by Tsagas

[5] and Springer [4] respectively.

Let be a K curve relative to congruence and a union curve relative

to the congruence , then

, wqBvp ii ...(2.4a)

Page 56: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

52

and ,

yqds

dys ...(2.4b)

Using (2.2), (2.3) and (2.4), we get

,ii pwvr ;nwKC ...(2.5)

,ii

i ypdsdx

xs nyKD ...(2.6)

Defining jiij rrgR 2

,2 jiij ssgS ,2

1ji

ij ppgk

RS

srg iiijcos

and using equation (2.5) and (2.6), we have

.cos 1DKSKn This equation and the facts

,1 22 DSg ...(2.7a)

22

121 nKkK ...(2.7)b

yields

2/122

2/121

sin1

1

S

SeKKn and K(1)

2/122

1

sin1

cos

S

SeK...(2.8)

where, e=1 or -1 in order that cose be non-negative. Since S and cos depend

upon the congruence and , we have the following propositions from equation

(2.8):

Theorem 2.1. If a special curve relative to a fixed congruence is an union curve

relative to another fixed congruence , then the normal and first curvature (w.r.t.

Kn) at a given point of the curve are proportional to its first curvature (w.r.t.enveloping space).

Theorem 2.2. If the component of the vector fields and , tangent to the

hypersurface are in the same direction, then the ratio of the two first curvature is

equal to magnitude of the tangential (to the hypersurface) component .

Page 57: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

53

Proof. Since ri and si are along the same direction 1cos and .0sin Therefore,

from (2.8), we have(k(1)/K(1))= S .

3. Hyperasymptotic Curves A hyperasymptotic curve (of order one)

related to is characterized by Mishra ([1], [3])

2101 yx . ...(3.1)

From the first two Frenet's formulae (refer equation(2.1)), we deduce

2211021 log KKqK

dsd

Ks

q . ...(3.2)

Another expression for s

q

can be obtained with the help of (2.2) and the

relations (Mishra [2]).

Ndsdx

sB i

iji

and ds

dxBg

sN k

iij

jk

This later expression for s

q

and (3.1), (3.2) may be used in the elimination

of o . In view of these equations and equations (2.2), (2.3b), we get

dsdx

KKdsd

pds

dxgK

sp

Zdsdx

xsi

ik

jijkn

iii 2

111 log ,...(3.3)

,log 1

K

dsd

KKdsd

dsdx

pZD nn

ji

ij ...(3.4)

where

.

21

1

KK

yZ

Let iii210 ,, be the unit tangent, unit principal normal, unit first

binormal vectors and k(1), k(2) be the first and second curvature of the curve w.r.t.the hypersurface. The first two Frenet's formulae w.r.t. Kn yield

,log 221121

iiii

kkkdsd

pdsdx

ksp

...(3.5)

Page 58: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

54

From equations (2.7b), (3.3), (3.4), (3.5) and the definition

,

/cos

S

dsdxsg jiij

we deduce cos1 Sx and

dsdx

SsKdsd

KKdsd

dsdx

pi

inn

jk

kj cos.log 1

.log 221

1

12

dsdx

gKkkK

k

dsd

pdsdx

KDk

ijjkn

iii

n ...(3.6)

Theorem 3.1. A hyperasymptotic curve relative to is characterized by equation

(3.6).proof : Multiplying (3.6) by gil p

l and simplifying, we have

,logcoslog/cos

11

111

KK

dsd

SKK

k

dsd

DkkDKSds

dxp n

nn

ji

ij

where we have defined

.cos1 Sk

spg jiij

4. Hyperasymptotic and Special Curves. Let a hyperasymptotic curve

w.r.t. be a special curve related to . This implies that . Denoting

1

1

K

kX

and ,/ 1KKY n writing ii kp 11 and ddifferentiating the well known identity

,122 YX we get

,cos..cos 1 DYXSdsds

dsdY

SdsdX

Dj

iij

...(4.1)

0dsdY

YdsdX

X ...(4.2)

We shall discuss the solution of the above simultaneous equations in the

Page 59: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

55

following cases:

Case 1. The vector i1 is not conjugate w.r.t.

0.,. 1 ds

dsei

dsdx j

iij

i

and the

matrix

yS

XD

Acos

is non-singular. Equation (4.1) and (4.2) yield

Xdsds

dsdY

Ydsds

dsdX j

iij

ji

ij

11 ; .

The quantities

1

1

K

kX and 1/ KKY

n are obtained as solution of the

above simultaneous equations.

Case 2. Let i1 be conjugate w.r.t.

dsdxi

and the matrix A be non-singular. Equation

(4.1) and (4.2) have a unique solution given by the following

Theorem 4.1. If a special curve related to is a hyperasymptotic curve relative

to and the conditions mentioned above (in case 2) are satisfied, then the ratios

11 / Kk and 1/ KKn are the same at each point of the curve.

Case 3. The condition stated in case1 and 2 are not satisfied, i.e., the matrix A is

singular, dsds j

iij 1 may or may not be zero.

We have ,0cos1 SkDKn which in view of (2.7) yields the following

Theorem 4.2. If a K curve is hyperasymptotic relative to and the condition

mentioned in case 1 and 2 are not satisfied, then

2/122

1

2/12

2/121

1

sin1

cos

,sin1

1

S

SKK

S

SKk

n...(4.3)

Page 60: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

56

Comparing (4.3) and (2.8), we have the following

Theorem 4.3. If two special curves and relative to are respectively the

union and hyperasymptotic curves relative to another congruence and the

conditions stated in case 1 and 2 are not satisfied, then the modulus of the normal

curvature in the direction of is equal to the first curvature of and the first

curvature of is equal to the modulus of the normal curvature of .

REFERENCE[1] R.S. Mishra , A Course in Tensor with Appllication to Riemannian Geometry, Pothishala Private

Limited (1965).[2] R.S. Mishra , Hyperasymptotic curves on a Riemannian hyper-surface, Math. Student, 20, (1952),

63-65.[3] U.P. Singh, On sheeial union and hyherasymptatic curves is Riemannian spaces, Tensor(N.S.), 22

(1971), 15-18.[4] C. Springer, Union curves of a hypersurface, Can J. Math, 2 (1950), 457-460.

[5] G. Tsagas , Special curves of a hypersurface of Riemannian space, Tensor, N.S., 20, (1969), 88-90.

Page 61: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

57

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

MEROMORPHIC UNIVALINT FUNCTIONS WITH ALLTERNATINGCOEEFICIENTS

ByK.K. Dixit and Indu Bala Mishra

Department of Mathematics,Janta College, Bakewar, Etawah-206124, Uttar Pradesh, India

Emaial : [email protected](Received : March 8, 2008)

ABSTRACT

Let 0,, zBATM denote the subclass of functions

1

11n

nn

n zaza

zf

0,1 naa regular and univalent in the disk 10: zzD with a simple

pole at z=0 the conditions

Dz

zfzf

BzA

zfzzf

,1

'

1'

and 20

01

'z

zf where 0<z0<1.

Sharp coefficients estimates, radius of meromorphic convexity, integral transformof functions for this class have been obtained. It is also seen that the class

0,, zBATM is closed under convex linear combination and in the last, certain

convolution properties of functions have been studied,2000 Mathematics Subject clasification : Primary 32H04; Secondary 32Exx.Keywords : Meromerphic Univalent function, meromorphic cenvexity.

1. Introduction. Let be the class of functions of the form

...1 221 zazazzf that are regular and univalent in punctured disk

10: zzD with a simple pole z=0. A function f in is said to be starlike of

order 10 denoted by af * if zfzzf '

Re for .1z The class

* has been extensively studied by Bajpai [1], Cluni [2], Goel and Sohi [4],

Juneja and Reddy [5], Silverman [6] and others.

Page 62: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

58

Let m be the subclass of consisting of functions of the form

0...,1 3

32

21 nazazazaz

zf

1

1 ,11

n

nn

n zaz 0na ...(1.1)

Uralgaddi and Ganigi [7] have obtained certain results for meromorphicfunctions with alternating coefficients that are starlike of order .

Let BAM , denote the class of functions of the form (1.1) regular and

univalent in the punctured disk D satisfying the condition

. ,1'

1'

Dz

zfzzf

BA

zfzzf

Dixit and Misra [3] have determined certain interesting results for the class

BAM , , where A and B are fixed numbers .10,11 BBA

Let TM denote the class of functions

1

11 0,11

nn

nn

n aazaza

zf

regular and univalent in the disk D. Let TM(A,B) denote the subclass of functionsin TM satisfying the condition.

. , 1'

1'

Dz

zfzzf

BA

zfzzf

...(1.2)

Also TM(A,B,z0) denote the subclass of functions in TM(A,B) satisfying

200 1' zzf where .10 0 z

In this paper, we obtain sharp coefficient estimated, radius of meromorphicconvexity, integral transform of functions in TM(A,B,z0). It is also shown that theclass TM(A,B,z0) is closed under convex linear combination. In the last, convolutionproblem of functions have been studied.

We begin by recalling the following lemma due to Dixit and Misra [3].

Page 63: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

59

Lemma: A function f in M is in M (A,B) if and only if

1

.11n

n ABaABn ...(1.3)

2. Coefficient Estimates

Theorem 2.1. Let

1

11 .0,11

2 nn

nn

n aazaa

zf If f is regular in D and

satisfies 200 1' zzf , then 0,, zBATf M if and only if

1

110 . 111

nn

nn ABazABnABn ...(2.1)

The result is sharp.

Proof. We know from lemma (1.3) that a function

1

1 0,11

nn

nn

n bzbz

zg

regular in D, satisfies

. , 1'

1'

DzA

zgzg

Bz

zgzzg

if and only if

1

.11n

n ABbABn ...(2.2)

Applying the result to the function ,azfzg we find that f satisfies

(1.3) if and only if

1.11

nn ABaaABn ...(2.3)

Since ,1' 20zzf we also have from the representation of f(z) that

1

10

111n

nn

n znaa

Putting the value of a in inequality (2.3), we have the required result.For attaining the equality (2.1), we choose the function

Page 64: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

60

1

01

1

111

11

11

nn

nn

zABnABn

zABz

ABnzf ...(2.4)

From (2.4), we have

10

1111

nnn

zABnABn

ABa

or ,111 10

1 ABzABnABn nn

and

1

10

111n

nn

n znaa

1

01

10

1

111

11

nn

nn

zABnABn

zABn

.1111

111

01

nn zABnABn

ABn

3. Radius of Meromorphically Convexity

Theorem 3.1. If ,,, 0zBATf M then f is meromorphically convex of order

10 in the disc ,Rz where

11

inf1 2

111

n

n ABnnABn

R . ...(3.1)

This result is sharp for each n for functions of the form (2.4).Proof. In order to determine the required result, is suffices to show that

Rzzfzzf

1'''

2 for a function f(z) belonging to the class ,,, 0zBATM where

R is defined by (3.1). The details involved are fairly straight forward and may beomitted.

4. Integral Transform.

Theorem 4.1. If ,,, 0zBATf M then the integral transform

1

0 duuzfuczF c for ,0 c is in , ,',' 0zBATM where

Page 65: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

61

.

22'1'1 2

0

cz

ABZccABcBA

AB

The result is sharp for the function

2

02/12

zABBAzABzBA

zf

.

Proof. Let ,,,1 01

1 zBATzaza

zf Mn

nn

n

then

1

0 1

11 1 duzuaza

uczFn

ncnn

nc

.1

11

n

nnn

cnza

za

It is sufficient to show that

1

10 .1

1''''1'1'1

nn

nn

acnAB

zABnABn...(4.1)

Since 0,, zBATf M implies that

1

10

1

.1111

nn

nn

aAB

zABnABn

From Theorem 2.1, (4.1) will be satisfied if

1

011

1 111

'''1

nn z

cn

cABncABcnABn

ABB

...(4.2)

The right hand side of (4.2) is an increasing function of n, therefore putting n=1in (4.2) we have

.

222

'''1 2

0

cz

ABccABcBA

ABB

Hence the theorem.5. Closure Theorems

Theorem 5.1. Let be a real number such that .1 If ,,, 0zBATf M then

the function F defined by

Page 66: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

62

z

dttftz

zF

0 11

.

Also belong to 0,, zBATM .

Proof . The proof of Theorem 5.1 is similar to that of Dixit and Misra [3].

Since the class 0,, zBATM is convex, it does have some 'extreme points' given by

Theorem 5.2.

Theorem 5.2. Let z

zf1

and

.

111

11

11

10

1

1

nn

nn

nzABnABn

zABz

ABnzf

Then 0,, zBATh M if and only if it can be expressed in the form

1n

nn zfzfzh

where 0 and

1

1n

n .

Proof : Let us suppose that

1n

nn zfzfzh

1

11n

nn

n zaza

where

11

01111

11

nnn

n

zABnABn

ABna

and

10

1111

nn

nn

zABnABn

ABa

Then, it is easy to see that 200 1' zzh and the condition (2.1) is satisfied. Hence

0,, zBATh M . Conversely, Let 0,, zBATh M and

.11

1

n

nn

n zaza

zh

Page 67: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

63

Then, from (2.1), it follows that

1

01111

nnnzABnABn

ABa ....3,2,1n

Setting

n

nn

n aAB

zABnABn

1

01111

and

1

,1n

n

we have

1.

nnn zfzfzh

This completes the proof of the theorem.The following inclusion property is an easy consequence of the Theorem 2.1.

Theorem 5.3. Let

1

1 .,...,2,1,1n

nnj

njj mjza

z

azf If 0,, zBATf Mj for

each j=1,2,...,m, then the function

1

11n

nn

n zbzb

zh also belongs to 0,, zBATM , where

m

jjjab

1

,

1

,j

njjn ab mn ,...,2,1

0 j and

1

1j

j .

Theorem 5.4. If 01

1 ,,1 zBATzaza

zf Mn

nn

n

and

1

11n

nn

n zbZb

zg

with 1nb for n=1,2,3..., then 0,,* zBATgf M .

Proof. For convolution of functions f and g; we can write

Page 68: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

64

1

10

1

1

10

1 111111n

nnn

nnn

nn azABnABnbazABnABn

1 Since nb

B-A, by (2.1)

Hence, by theorem (2.1), 0,,* zBATgf M .

Note. It will be of interest to find other convolution results analogous to thoseof Juneja Reddy [5].

REFERENCES[1] S. K., A note on a class of meromorphic univalent functions, Rev. Roumanie Maths Puse Appl., 22

(1977). 295-297.[2] J. Clunie, On meromorphic Schlicht functions, J. London Math. Soc., 34 (1959) 215-216.[3] K.K. Dixit and Y.K. Misra, On a class of meromorphic starlike functions with alternating coefficients,

Acta Cientia Indica, XXVII M, No(1) (2001) 065.[4] R.M. Goel and N.S. Sohi, On class of Meromorphic function, Glasnik Mathematicki, 17 (1981), 19-

28.[5] O.P. Juneja and T.R. Reddy, Meromorphic starlike univalent functions with positive coefficients,

Annales Universitatis Mariae Curie- Sklodawska Lubin-Polonia, 39 (9) Section A (1985) 55-75.[6] H. Silverman , Univalent functions with negative coefficients, Proc. Amer. Math Soc. 51 (1975)

109-116.[7] B. A. Uralegaddi and M.D. Ganigi, Meromorphic starlike functions with alternating coefficients,

Rendiconti di Mathematica, Seril VII, Vol. II, Roma (1991), 441-446.

Page 69: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

65

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

A MATHEMATICAL MODEL FOR MIGRATION OF CAPILLARYSPROUTS WITH DIFFUSION OF CHEMOTTRACTANTCONCENTRATION DURING TUMOR ANGIOGENESIS

ByMadhu Jain, G. C. Sharma

Department of Mathematics, Institute of Basic Science,Dr B. R. Ambedkar University, Khandari, Agra-282002, Uttar Pradesh, India

Email : [email protected], [email protected]

Atar SinghDepartment of Mathematics, Bipin Bihari College, Jhansi-284128, U.P., India

(Received : March 12,2008)

ABSTRACTIn this paper, we develop a simplified mathematical model for tumor

angiogenesis, which is the process of sprout growth, forming new blood vesselsfrom already existing micro vessels. The diffusion of tumor angiogenesis factor inextra cellular matrix is explored and the effects of TAF, chemottractantconcentration, on tip density and vessel density have also been discussed. Theanalytical solution has been obtained. The numerical experiments have beenperformed to justify the same and to facilitate sensitivity analysis.2000 Mathematics Subject Classification : Primary 92C10 Secondary 92C37.Keywords: Angiogenesis, Tumor growth, Diffusion, TAF, Neovascularization.

1. Introduction. The studies on cancer are being made due to its prevalenceall over the world. Very recently a known scientist Sasi Sekharan from MIT, USAhas tested the molecular size bomb on the skin or lung cancer of the mice. Basically,solid tumors are the collection of tumor cells, which are the core factors in cancerresearch. Other factors like neovascularization and the interstitium are alsoaccountable for solid tumor growth. The aim of all the studies in this area is tofind a drug, which can penetrate deep into tumors, cut of the blood supply anddetonate a lethal dose of anticancer toxins without harming healthy cells. Solidtumors are of two types, avascular and vascular. Initially solid tumors are smallmass cells within the tissue. But this mass multiplies rapidly due to the process ofmultation. At initial stage, avascular tumor growth leads to non-metastatic tumor,which may remain dormant for long time. At avascular stage, tumor growth maynot be possible beyond 1-2 millimeters.

For tumor growth, vascularization to tumor is one of the important factors.This process occurs both in non-malignant conditions. Angiogenesis is the process

Page 70: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

66

of sprouting new blood vessels from already exsting micro vessels. To make thetumor vascularized, solid tumor secrets some chemical compounds, which stimulateendothelial cells (EC) of the tissue. Some enzymes secreted by EC, break downbasement of membrane, allowing endothelial cells to proliferate across the disruptedmembrane into extra cellular matrix. On the basis of this process, new capillarysprouts form and migrate towards a vascular solid tumor. Finally, a network ofcapillaries is formed and penetrates into the tumor. Then a solid tumor getsvascularization. Many researchers developed mathematical models related to tumorgrowth in different frame works.

Muthu et al. (1982) studied tumor induced-neovascularization in mouseeye. Chaplain and Sleemen (1990) developed a mathematical model for produtionand secretion of tumor angiogenesis factor in tumors. Adam and Maggelakis (1990)explored diffusion regulated growth characteristics of spherical pre-vascularcarcinoma. Lauffenburger and Stokes (1991) analysed the roles of microvesselendothelial cell random motility and chemotaxis in angiogenesis. Chaplain andStuart (1993) provided a mechanism for chemotrctic response of endothelial cellsto tumor angiogenesis. Byrne and Chaplain (1999) developed a model of vascularsolid tumor growth. Cui and Friedman (2001) developed a mathematical model ofthe growth of necrotic tumors. Friedman and Reitch (2001) worked on the existenceof spatially patterned dormant malignancies in a model for the growth of non-necrotic vascular tumor. Levine et al. (2001) discussed onset of capillary formationinitiating angiogenesis. Petted et al. (2001) studied the migration of cells inmulticells tumor angiogenesis. Petted et al. (2001) studied the migration of cellsin multicells tumor spheroids. McDougall et al. (2002) examined mathematicallythe flow through networks: in order to study tumor-induced angiogenesis andchemotherapy strategies. Bazaliy and Friedman (2003) prepared a model of tumorgrowth. Cui and Friedman (2003) studied a hyperbolic free boundary problemsmodeling tumor growth. Owen et al. (2004) did work on mathematical modeling ofthe use of macrophages as vehicles for drug delivery to hypoxic tumor sites. Theyinvestigated the role of chemotaxis and chemokine production and the efficacy ofmacrophages as vehicles for drug delivery. Plank et al. (2004) formulated amathematical model of tumor angiogenesis, regulated by vascular endothelialgrowth factor and the angiopoietins. this work attempted to provide a mathematicaldescription of the role of the angiopoietins in angiogenesis. Tarabolette andGiavazzi (2004) suggested modeling approaches for angiogenesis and designed foranti-angiogenic compounds.

The paper mathematical modeling is capable of providing deep insight intothe ways by which one can think of producing some medicine to destroy the blood

Page 71: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

67

vessels feeding the tumor. In this paper, we have modelled sprout growth duringtumor angiogenesis and diffusion of TAF in extra cellular matrix. Our focus inthe present investigation is on capillary sprout growth, diffusion of TAF and roleof angiogenesis in tumor growth. The simplified model is solved analytically. Byrneand Chaplain (1996) have not considered the diffusion of tumor angiogenesis factorin their studies. Our effort in this paper is to extend their studies for morecomplicated cases by incorporating this factor. We examine the diffusion ofchemottractant concentration , the role of angiogenesis in tumor growth. thenumerical experiments have also been performed to visualize the effects of variousparameters on tip and vessel densities. The present investigation is organized inthe following way. In section 2, we describe mathematical model by stating requisiteassumptions and notations. The analysis part of the paper has been discussed insection 3. The numerical illustrations are presented to validate analytical resultsin section 4. The section 5 provides descussion part and concluding remarks.

2. The Model. It is well known that vessels within a sprout have a velocityforming the continuity of the tip-vessels structure. Tumor angiogenesis factor(TAF) concentration is governed by reaction-diffusion equation based on theexperimental observation and earlier studies. We consider the finite and uni-directional model for sprout growth and diffusion to tumor. This model isformulated in terms of tip density, vessel density and TAF concentration. Thetumor is at x=0 and limbus is at x=1, (0<=x<=1). Following Byrne and Chaplain(1996) model , that vascular front with tips stimulated by TAF and sprouting fromcapillary vessels. The proliferation of tip occurs at the vascular edge (13) and istriggered when exceeded threshold concentration c'. The vessels within the sproutsmigrate to tumor and decay linearly. For TAF concentration, reaction-diffusionequation with linear-decay has been used. We use the following notations formathematical formulation of the problem.

The set of partial differential equations governing the model (Byrne andChaplain, 1996) is given by

nncccHcxc

nxx

ntn

'102

2

...(1)

xc

nxn

t...(2)

cxc

Dtc

2

2

, ...(3)

where n(x,t), (x,t), c(x,t) are the density, vessel density and TAF concentration,

Page 72: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

68

respectively. D and H are the diffusion coefficient of TAF and Hevinside unit

function. 10 ,,,,,,, c are rate of TAF decay, rate of vessel density decay,

threshold TAF concentration, rate of tip to branch anastomoses, random tipmotility, chemo taxis coefficient, first tip proliferation rate, second proliferationrate respectively.

At the tumor, c is at constant value 1 and n=0, if tips penetrate the tumor,then our model is not applicable. At the limbus, c=0, while n and decay

exponentially to zero. If tip and capillary once formed then the capillary buds'production at limbus is stopped.Initial and boundary conditions are

,0,0 tn ,,1 ktcentn ,00, xn for ,10 x cnn 0,1 ...(4)

,1,1 minminktet ,00, x for ,10 x 10,1 ...(5)

0,1,1,0 tctc 00, cxc for ,10 x ...(6)where k is decay rate of tip and vessel density.

3. The Analysis. The TAF concentration for unsteady profile with thehelp of the equations (3) and (6) can be obtained as:

1

0 cos1

22

rn

tD

n

nt xeecc n ...(7)

where

,...,3,2,1 and

212

nn

n

Chaplain and Stuart [9], estimated motility coefficient for cells chemicals

Dcell/Dchemical= 010 3 .

Then vessel density within the sprout is given by

xc

nt

...(8)

Solving the equation (8) with the help of the equation (5), we have

1

0 ,sin122

r

tDn

rt dttxnexec n ...(9)

The non-linear wave equation for tip density can be reduced to

nncccHcx

cn

xc

xn

tn

'102

2

...(10)

With the help of equation (9), the equation (10) in terms of n(x,t) and c(x,t) can bewritten as

Page 73: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

69

ncncccHxc

xn

tn

n

02

1 '

dttxnexeC tDn

tr n ,sin212

0 ...(11)

We simplify the model with the concept that the vessels form tips for a very short

time and in view of this ,0

tn

so that ., ndxdc

tx

Now we have

2021 ' n

dxdc

cndxdc

ccHxc

xn

tn

n

...(12)

With the condition

n(0,t)=0 n(x,0)=H(x–x*), n(1,t)=1 for some 1,0*x

we further simplify the model in respect of TAF concentration and tip creationrates. For more simple approximation, if we consider,

,0 ,00 1' ccH .

The reduced equation is given as follows:

221 n

dxdc

ncncxn

xc

tn

n

...(13)

We use perturbation method for approximation of n(x,t), which provides

..., 22

210 titi exnexnxntxn ...(14)

where is a small quantity.Now

tieintn

1 ,xn

exn

xn ti

10 ...(15)

From equations (14) and (15), we get

xn

exn

xeCein tin

trti 1001 sin12

nti

ntr ennxec /cos12 1010

tin

trn ennxeC 100 cos12

titintr

ennennxeC

10

221

220

0 2sin12

...(16)

where 2nD .

Page 74: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

70

Comparing terms free of on both sids, we have

0200

10 .cot.cot nxnnxxn

nnnn

or 200

0 '.cot nFnxFxn

n

where

nn

F 1 and

'F .

On solving, equation (17) with the help of (4), we get

dxxF

xn

Gn

Gn

sin'

sin0

where2

21

n

nG

.

Now comparing the coefficients of on both sides. we have

n

nn

trn

tr xeC

xn

xeCin

cos12.sin12 1

20

101

100 .sin12

nnxeC n

tr

or 11

2

01 .cossinsin nixpxn

pdxdn

xp nn

nnn

...(18)

On solving the differential equation (18), we get

CxP

xdxdxx

xn n

n

GnG

n

Gn 2/tanlogsinlog

sin

sinlog 1 ...(19)

With the help of the (4), then we haveC=0,

2/tanlogsinlogsin

sinlog 1 x

Pxdx

dxx

xn n

n

GnG

n

Gn

...(20)

2/tanlogsinlog

sinsin

1

xP

xdxdxx

xn

n

GnG

n

Gn

enBe ...(21)

where

2/tanlogsinlogsin

sinx

Pxdx

dxx

xB n

n

GnG

n

Gn .

Page 75: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

71

Now tn eCp 12 0 ,

pi

P

..., 0 Bti eentxn ...(22)

Substituting the values of n0 and n1 in (22), we have

tiG

n

Gn e

dxxF

xtxn

sin'

sin,

...2/tanlogsinlogsin

sinexp

xP

xdxdxx

xn

n

GnG

n

Gn

.

4. Numerical Results. The effect of various parameters on TAF, vesseldensity and tip density has been examined by considering a numerical illustration.

We fix default parameters as ,1,4.,1,8.,01. 10 rc ,100 ,001.

,000002. to obtain numerical results, which are depicted in figures 1-4.

Figs. 1(a-c) depict that chemottractant concentration (c) varying x fordifferent rate of diffusion coefficients (D) for t=0.8, 1,2, 1.6, respectively. It is noticedthat the concentration decreases by increasing x and it is highest where tumor issituted (i.e. x=0) and is almost zero at limbus (i.e. x=1). The chemottractantconcentration decreases as the rate of diffusion increases. Initially the concentrationdecreases slightly upto x=0.2 but beyond this, it decreases sharply. On comparingthe figs. 1(a-c) we see that the concentration decreases as time increases; differenceof concentration for different values of D increases as time increases butdiminishes towards limbus.

Figs. 2(a-c) demonstrate the chemottactant concentration profile fordifferent values of x. We see that concentration decreases as time increases anddistance of limbus from tumor (x) increases. It is also clear from the figures thatthe concentration, at D=0.3 for t=2.8 and for different values of x, is almost zero;however for lower value fo D depicted in figures 2 (a)& 2 (b) for D=0.01 and D=0.1,respectively, the value of c becomes almost zero much later. Thus the diffusioncoeficient has significant effect in the growth of the tumor.

It figures 3 (a-c); the effects of different parameters on vessel density ( )

are depicted. Fig.3(a) illustrates vessel density ( ) vs. x (distance of limbus from

tumor) at different time. We observe that at limbus (x=1) the vessel density ishighest and at tumor site (x=0) the vessel density is zero; the vessel densityincreases with time but the effect is more prevalent for higher values of x. In fig3(b), we see that the vessel density increases initially sharply with x upto x=0.6,but beyond that, the density increases gradually with x. It also increases as ,

Page 76: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

72

increases. In fig. 3(c), which shows the vessel density profile for different values of , initially the vessel density increases slightly with time but later on it increases

sharply. Upto t=0.4, the vessel formation for all values of is very slow and beyond

that, the vessel formation increases sharply as increases.

Figs. 4(a-c) demonstrate tip density (n) vs. for different values of t and .

From fig. 4(a) we see that tip density increases steeply with x upto x=0.7 but beyond,the tip formation is static upto x=0.8 and onwards tip formation decreases. Thetip density does not change with time; the path of tip formation is of wave type.Fig. 4(b) exhibits that tip density (n) increases as and x increases upto x=0.7,

beyond this, its increasing trend slows down and converges at limbus (at x=1) fordifferent values of . From the fig. 4(c), it is clear that tip density is free of time

and increases as increases.

From numerical experiment performed concluding we infer that-The chemottractant concentration decreases as x,D and t increase; higherfalling trends for lower rate of diffusion is noticed. For very long time, theconcentration is static. Thus higher rate of diffusion and increasing trend intime decrease the chemottractant concentration, which is quite natural inreal life situation.The effect of diffusion coefficient is more prevalent on chemottractantconcentration.The vessel density is highest at limbus and decays to zero from limbus to thetumor. Also it decays as time increases and x decreases.Initially, the tip density at limbus is highest but it sharply decreases towardstumor and is almost zero at the tumor. It is also static with time.The effect of on the tip density and vessel density is quite remarkable . The

path of tip density is in the form of wave propagation.5. Conclusion. We have formulated a simplified mathematical model of

capillary sprout growth with diffusion for TAF concentration for cancer cells toexamine its ability to induce vascularization of the tumor in order to receive oxygenand nutrients. We make some simplifications to find out the effects of tip densityand vessel density on tumor angiogenesis. The tip density and vessel density dependson TAF concentration. The diffusion is considered and its effects are discussed onTAF. Also the effects of various parameters on tip density and vessel density havebeen explained. It is very clear from the result that the TAF concentration dependson the rate of diffusion.

Page 77: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

73

Page 78: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

74

Page 79: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

75

REFERENCES[1] A. Adam and , S.A. Maggelais, Diffusion regulated growth characteristics of spherical pre-vascular

carcinoma, Bull. Math. Biol., 52 (1990), 549-582.[2] B. V. Bazaliy, A. Friedman , A free boundary problem for an elliptic- parabolic system: Application to

a model of tumor growth, Comm. PDE, 28 (2003), 627-675.[3] H.M. Byrne and M.A.J. Chaplain, : A weakly non-linear analysis of model of vascular solid tumar

growth, J.Math. Biol., 39 (1999). 59-89.[4] S. Cui and A. Friedman, Analysis of matheamatical model of the growth of necrotic tumors, J. Math.

Anal., 255 (2001) 636-677.[5] S. Cui and A. Friedman,: A hyperbolic free boundary problem modeling tumor growth, Int-Faces and

Free Bounds, 5 (2003), 159-182.[6] A. Friedman, and F. Reitich: On the existence of spatially patterned dormant malignancies in a

model for the growth of non-necrotic vascular tumor, Math. Models Mach. Appl., 77 (2001), 1-25.[7] H.M. Byrne and M.A.J. Chaplain, Explicit solution of a simplified model of capillary sprout growth

during tumor angiogenesis, Appl. Mah.Lett., 9 (1996), 69-74.[8] M.A.J. Chaplain and B.D. Sleeman, A matematical model for producton and secretion of tumor

angiogenesis factor in tumors, M.A.J. Maths. Appl. Med. Biol.,7 (1990).[9] M.A.J.Chaplain and A.M. Stuart, A model mechanism for the chemotactic response of endothelial

cells to tumor angiogenesis factor, M.A.J. Math. Appl. Med. Biol.,10 (1993), 149-168.[10] H.A. Levine and B.D. Sleeman and M. Nilsen-Hamilton, Mathematical modeling of onset of capillary

formation initiating angogenesis, J. Math. Biol. 42 (2001), 1432-1466.[11] D.A.J. Lauffenburger and C.L. Stokes, Analysis of the roles of micro vessles endothelial cell random

motility and chemo taxis in angiogenesis, J. Theo. Biol., 152 (1991) 377-403.[12] S.R. Mc Dougall, A.R.A. Anderson, M.A.J. Chaplain and J.A. Sheratt, Mathematical modeling of flow

through vascular networks: Implications for tumor-induced angiogenesis and chemotherapystrategies, Bull. Math. Biol., 64 (2002), 673-702.

[13] V.R. Muthukkaruppen, L. Kubai and R. Auerbach. Tumor-induced neovascularization in mouse eye,J. Natl. Cancer Inst., 69 (1982) 699-705.

[14] M.R. Owen, H.M. Byrne and C. E. Lewis, Mathematical modeling of the use of macrophages asvehicles for drug delivery to hypoxic tumor sites, J. Thio. Biol. 226 (2004), 377-391.

[15] G. Pettet, C.P. Please, M. J. Tindall and D. McElwain, The migration of cells in multicell tumorspheroid, Bull. Math. Biol., 03 (2001), 231-257.

[16] M.J. Plank, B.D. Sleeman, and P.F. Jones, A mathematical model of tumor angiogenesis, regulated byvascular endothelial growth factor and the angiopoitins, J. Theo. Biol., 229 (2004), 435-454.

[17] G. Tarabolette and R. Giavazzi, Modeling approaches for angiogenesis, Europ. J. Cancer, 40 (2004),881-889.

Page 80: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

76

Page 81: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

DIFFUSION-REACTION MODELFOR MASS TRANSPORTATION INBRAIN TISSUES

ByMadhu Jain, G.C. Sharma

Department of MathematicsInstitute of Basic Science, Khandari, Agra-282002, Uttar Pradesh, India

E-mail :[email protected], [email protected]

Ram SinghDepartment of Mathematics,

St. John's College, Agra, 282002, Uttar Pradesh, IndiaE-mail: [email protected]

(Received : April 12, 2008)

ABSTRACTThis investigation deals with the study of mass transport in brain tissues.

The tissues in the human body are considered as porous medium by keeping thefact in mind that these are made up of dispersed cells seperated by connectivevoids through which nutrients and other menerals are available to each cell in thetissues. The general diffusion-reaction equations have been used to elucidate thedeveloped bi-layer model. The mass concentrations have been obtained at bothlayers. The importance of porosity and tortuosity factors has also been discussed.The diffusion-reaction process is more realistic one .2000 Mathematics Subject Classification : Primary 92C18; Secondary 92C37.Keywords : Brain tissues, Mass transport, Diffusion-reaction model, Porosity,Tortuosity,

1. Introduction. Diffusion of molecules in the brain and other tissues isimportant in wide range of biological processes and measurements ranging fromthe delivery of drugs to diffusion- weighted magnetic resonance imaging. Thediffusion molecules may have different diffusion co-efficients and concentrationsin the different domains, namely within the tubes’ inner core, membrane and withinthe outer medium. Biological tissues are multi compartmental heterogeneous mediacomposed of cellular and subcellular domains. Diffusion of mass transport is verysensitive to the local environment in tissues, and is affected by the packinggeometry of the cells and thier membrane permeability that controls the exchangeof the nutrients molecules across the membranes.

The main aim of our investigation is to find out the concentrations of thenutrients at two different layers of the brain tissues by using diffusion-reaction

Page 82: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

78

model. The diffusion-reaction in a geometrically complicated environment is , ona microscopic level, an extremely difficult process. But in biological application,we are often satisfied with macroscopic level. Several researchers have studieddiffusion-reaction models in different frameworks.

Vafai and Tien [14] studied a numerical scheme to evaluate the velocityand temperature fields inside a porous medium near an impermeable boundary.They presented a new concept of momentum boundary leyer central to numericalroutine. Puri et al. [10] developed a mathematical model to predict the steadystate transport of a conservative, neutrally bouyant tracer injected along thecenterline into a fully developed turbulent pipe flow. A mathematical model inwhich, steady state transport of a decaying contaminant in a fractured porousrock matrix by two dimensional diffusion and vertical advection which is treatedby Fourier Sine Transform technique, has been studied by Fogden et al. [4]. Tompsonand Dougherty [13] studied a two-step particle-in-cell model for reactive masstransport problems in subsurface porous formation and then applied this modelto non-lineat diffusion-reaction system. Kangle et al. [7] presented a generalanalytical solution for one-dimensional solute transport in heterogeneous porousmedia with scale dependent dispersion. McDougall et al. [8] used flow modelingtools and tecniques in the field of petroleum engineering. They examined the effectsof fluid viscosity, blood vessels size and theoretical networks geometry upon (i)the rate of flow through network (ii) the amount of fluid present in the completenetwork (iii) the amount of fluid reaching the tumor.

A mathematical model for the oxygen transport in the brainmicrocirculation in the presence of blood substitues has been developed by Sharanand Popel [12]. Bertuzzi et al. [12] investigated a mathematical model for theevolution of a tumor cord after treatment by using extensive numerical simulation.A mathematical model combined with a physical model to simulate the growthcharacteristics of a single bubble in liquid by the process of rectified diffusion hasbeen developed by Meidani and Hasan [9]. Their model is besed on the coupledmomentum energy and mass transport equations. Water diffusion model withinthe structure of a brain extracellular space for various diffusion parameters ofbrain tissue namely extracellular space, porosity and tortuosity has numericallybeen analyzed by Vafai et al. [15], Hrabe et al. [5] studied a mathematical model foreffective diffusion and tortuosity in the extracellular space of the brain . Theyused a volume-averaging procedure to obtain a general expression for the tortusityin a complex envirnment. Jain and Sharma [6] developed a time dependentmathematical model for oxygen transport in peripheral nerve tissues by usingKrogh cylinder symmetry. Sen and Basser [11] presented a mathematical modelfor diffusion of white matter in brain by using diffusion tensor imaging method to

Page 83: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

79

characterize neuronal tissue in the human brain. Arifin et al. [1] used mathematicalmodeling and simluation to provide a comprehensive review of drug release frompolymeric microspheres and of drug transport in adjacent tissue. An experimentalinvestigation of the effect fo water diffusion exchange between compartments onthe paramagnetic relaxation enhancement of paramagnetic agent compartmenthas been presented by Zhang et al. [16]. El-Kabeir et al. [3] studied a mathematicalmodel for combined magneto-hydrodynamic (MHD) heat and mass transport ofnon-Darcy natural convection about an impermeable horizontal cylinder in a nonNewtonian power law fluid embedded in porous medium under magnetic field andthermal radiation effects.

In this investigation, we construct diffusion-reaction equations tounderstand the concept of mass transport in brain tissues. We shell develop amathematical model by considering solute concentration at two different layers.The rest of the paper is arranged as follows. The model description, notations andgoverning equations have been provided in the Section 2. Section 3 is to devote theanalysis of the model. Finally, the conclusions are drawn in the Section 4.

2. Model Description. The present investigation is concerned with themass transport in porous medium by using diffusion-reaction equations inbiological tissues particularly in brain tissues. Two concepts porosity and toruosityhave been incorporated in the model. Porosity determines what percentage of thetotal tissue volume is accessible to the diffusing molecules and on the other handtortuosity describes the average hindrance of a complex medium relative toobstacles-free medium. One-dimensional transient diffusion-reaction equationshave been constructed to find out mass concentration at different situations. It isalso assumed that the chemical reaction coefficient at both layers is constant andequal.Followings are the notations used to formulate the model mathematically:

txCi , Concentration of mass transport in ith (i=1,2) layer

Di Diffusivity of ith layer, i=1,2

i Tortouosity of ith layer, i=1,2

Si Mass source density of ith layer , i=1,2

i Porosity of ith layer, i=1,2

K Chemical reaction co-efficientt Time.

Governing Equations. The equations governing the mass transport in the braintissues due to diffusion-reaction process are constructed as follows:Then, the deffusion-reaction equation for the concentration in layer-1 is

Page 84: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

80

,,

,

,

1

112

121

11

S

txKCx

txCDt

txC...(1)

The diffusion-reaction equation for the concentration in layer-2 is

,,

,

,

2

222

222

22

S

txKCx

txCDt

txC...(3)

The interface between two layers is at x=a. The perfect contacting is assumed atinterface and concentration at that position is same.The initial and boundary conditions for equations (2)-(3) are given as

0, at0

,

0,0 at0

,0,0 at,0,0 at,

2

1

02

01

tbxt

txC

txt

txCbxtxCtxCaxtxCtxC

...(4)

The matching conditions are

0, at,

0, at

,

,0, at,,

212

2

1

1,21

22

11

21

taxSS

DD

taxt

txCD

ttxC

D

taxtxCtxC

...(5)

3. Mathematical Analysis: Taking Laplace Transform of the equation(2), we obtain

11212

12

,

,YpxC

dx

pxCd ...(6)

where pKD

1

212

1 and . 1

10

1

21

1

p

SC

DY

There fore, 21

11

11,

YBeAepxC xxa . ...(7)

Again talking the Laplace Transform of the equation (3), we get

22222

22

,

,YpxC

dx

pxCd ...(8)

where pKD

2

222

2 and

p

SC

DY

2

20

2

22

2 .

Page 85: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

81

Therefore, 2222 22, YDeCepxC xxa . ...(9)

Transformed boundary and machining conditions are

0, at

,

,0, at,,

0, at0

,

0,0 at0

,

22

11

21

2

1

taxdx

pxCdD

dxpxCd

D

taxpxCpxC

tbxdx

pxCd

txdx

pxCd

...(10)

Using these conditions, the solutions of eqs (7) and (9), are:

pxC ,1

n

r

n

r

m n

n

r

nnn

r

rrnm

rnn

rnn

SSDD

rnn

rnn

0 0 12

0 0 0 2

2

1

1

2

12

2

1

10

2 3

1

1

1

21

122

21

Yp

e

p

e pKpK

...(11)

pxC ,2

n

r

n

r

m n

n

r

nnn

r

rrnm

rnn

rnn

SSDD

rnn

rnn

0 0 12

0 0 0 1

1

2

2

1

22

1

2

10

2 3

1

211

22

222

43

Yp

e

p

e pKpK

...(12)

Taking inverse Laplace Transform of eqs (11) and (12), we get

Page 86: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

82

txc ,1

n

r

n

r

m n

n

r

nn

n

r

rrnm

rnn

rnn

SSDD

rnn

rnn

0 0 32

0 0 0 2

2

1

1

2

12

2

1

210

2 3

1 2

31

t u

KuKt u

KuK

duuteu

duuteu

0 4

32

0 4

31

22

...(13)

KtKt eK

SeC

1

1

10

txc ,2

n

r

n

r

m n

n

r

nnn

r

rrnm

rnn

rnn

SSDD

rnn

rnn

0 0 12

0 0 0 1

1

2

2

1

22

1

2

10

2 3

1

211

t u

KuK

uK

uKduute

uduute

u

0 4

341

0 4

33

22

(14)

KtKt eK

SeC

1

2

20

where

.02

1222 312

22

1

11

rrab

Dxrrma

D

.02

1222 312

22

1

12

rrab

Dxrrma

D

Page 87: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

83

.02

12 21

131

2

23

ar

Daxrrmab

D

.02

12 21

131

2

24

ar

Daxrrmab

D

4. Conclusion. In this study we have developed a diffusion-recation modelfor the mass transport in biological tissues, pariticularly in the brain tissues. Thetransporation of nutrients, oxygen, glucose etc. in the brain tissues from vascularsystem through diffusion-reaction process has been investigated. The analyticalexpressions for mass concentration in two layers have been obtained. It has alsobeen obserbed that the porosity and tortuosity affect the mass transport signifi-cantly. Our investigation may be helpful in the treatment for brain tumor men-tally ratarded patients, in particular when clemical reaction is taken in to consid-eration.

REFERENCES[1] D.Y. Arifin, L.Y. Lee, and C.H. Wang, Mathematical modeling and simulation of drug release from

microspheres: Implication to drug delivery systems, Adv. Drug Del. Rev., 58, No. 12-13 (2006)1274-1325.

[2] A Bertuzzi, A. D’onofrio, A.Fasano and A.Gandoffi, Regression and re-growth of tumour cordsfollowing single-dose anti-cancer treatment, Bull Math. Bio.,65, No.5.(2003), 903-931.

[3] S.M.M. El-Kabier, M.A. El-Hakim and A.M. Rashad, Group method analysis of combined heat andmass transfer by MHD non-Darcy non-Newtonion natural convection adjacent to horizontal cylin-der in a saturated porous medium, Appl. Math. Model., 2007 (In Press).

[4] A. Fogden, K.A. Landman, and L.R. White, Contaminant transport in fractured porous media:steady state solutions by Fourier Sine Transform method, Appl. Math. Model.,13, No. 3 (1989),160-177.

[5] J. Hrabe, S. Hrabetova and K. Segeth, A model of effective diffusion and tortuosity in the extracel-lular space of the brain, Biophy., 87 (2004), 1606-1617.

[6] M. Jain and G.C. Sharma, A computational solution of mathematical model for oxygen transport inperipheral nerve, Comput. Bio. Med., 34 (2004), 633-645.

[7] H. Kangle, T.V. Genuchten and Z. Renduo, Exact solutions for one dimensional transport withasymptotic scale dependent dispersion, App. Math. Mod., 20 No.4 (1996), 298-308.

[8] S.R. MeDougall, A.R.A. Anderson, M.A.J. Chaplain and J.A. Sherratt, Mathematical modeling offlow through vascular networks: Implication for tumor-induced angiogenesis and chemotherapystrategies, Bull. Math. Bio., 64, No. 4 (2002), 673-702.

[9] A.R.N. Meidani and M. Hasan, Mathematical and physical model of growth due to ultrasound, App.Math. Mod., 28 No.4 (2004), 333-351.

[10] A.N. Puri, C.Y. Kou and R.S. Chapman, Turbulent diffusion of mass in circular pipe flow, App.Math. Mod., 7, Issue 2 (1983), 135-138.

[11] P.N. Sen, and P.J. Basser, A model for diffusion in white matter in the brain, Biophy., 89 (2005),2927-2938.

Page 88: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

84

[12] M. Sharan, A.S. Popoel, A compartmental model for oxygen transport in brain microculation in thepresence of blood substitutes, J. Theo. Bio., 216 (2002), 479-500.

[13] A. F. B. Tompson and D.E. Dougherty, Particle-grid method for reacting flows in porous media withapplication to Fisher’s equation, App. Math. Mod., 16 Issue7 (1992), 374-383.

[14] K. Vafai and C.L. Tien, Boundary and inertia effect on flow and heat transfer in porous media, Int.J.Heat Mass Tranhsfer, 24 (1980), 195-203.

[15] K. Vafai, K. Khanafer and A. Kangarlu, Computational modeling of cerebral diffusion-application ofstroke imaging, Meg. Res. Img., 21 Issue 6 (2003), 651-661.

[16] H. Zhang, Y. Xie and T. Ji, Water diffusion-exchange effect on the paramagnetic relaxation enhance-

ment in off-resonance rotating frame, J. Mag. Res., 186 Issue 2 (2007), 259-272.

Page 89: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

RELIABILITY ESTIMATION OF PARALLEL-SERIES SYSTEM USINGC-H-A ALGORITHM

ByA.K. Agarwal

Department of MathematicsHindu College, Moradabad, Uttar Pradesh, India

andSuneet Saxena

Department of MathematicsBhagwat Institute of Technology, Muzaffanagar, Uttar Pradesh, India

E-mail: [email protected](Received : March 15, 2008)

ABSTRACTC-H-A algorithm is based on based on minimal path set to evaluate system

structure function. Once one obtain the expression for the structure function, thesystem reliability computation becomes straight-forward. In this paper, we havestudied C-H-A algorithm and applied it to estimate the reliability of parallel-seriessystem.2000 Mathematics Subject Classification: Primary Secondary.Keywords: C-H-A-algorithm, structure function, Reliability, Parallel-seriessystem.

1. Introduction. A very general alternative approach for analyzing thereliability of complex system is through the use of the system structure function.Once one obtains the expression for the structure function, the system reliabilitycomputation becomes straight-forward. Such attempts have been made in theclassical 1975 book by Barlow and Proshan [3]. Various algorithms have beendeveloped to evaluate structure function. Aven Algorithm [1] is based on minimalcut sets. It depends on the initial choices of 2 parameters. Recently Chaudhari, Huand Afshar [4] proposed new algorithm based on minimal path set to evaluatesystem structure function. They named it C-H-A algorithm.

In this paper, we study C-H-A algorithm and apply it to estimate thereliability of parallel- series system.

2. Notations and Definitions(2.1) Notations

n : Number of components.x1 : State of ith component.x : (x1, x2,..., xi,...,xn) states of the components.

Page 90: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

86

x : Structure function.

P1 : Probability{x1=1} : reliability of ith component.R : Reliability of system.

(2.2) Definitions(2.2.1)Structure Function

Let

01

1xifif

componentcomponent

ii hasoperates

.failed

Then the system structure function is defined as

01

xifif

SystemSystem

hasoperates

.failed

(2.2.2) Reliability of SystemReiability of system in terms of structure function is defined as

R=probability 1 x

xE

where .0 xE probability .0 x +1. Probability .1x

(2.2.3) Coherent SystemA system is coherent when a component reliability improvement does not

degrade the system reliability. A coherent system has a structure function that ismonotonically increasing.

if ,ii xy for i=1 to n.

then . xy

(2.2.4)Relevant ComponentIf the inequality is strict for a given component i, then that component is

said to be relevant.(2.2.5)Path Set

A path set is a set of components whose functioning ensures that the systemfunctions.(2.2.6)Minimal Path set

A minimal path is one in which all the components within the set mustfunction for the system to function.(2.2.7) (Cut Set)

A set is a cut of components whose failure will result in a system failure.(2.2.8)Minimal Cut Set

A minimal cut is one in which all the components must fail in order for the

Page 91: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

87

system to fail.(2.2.9)OR Operaton (Binary)

1.1=1, 1.0=1, 0.1=1, 0.0=0.3. Reliability of system Using C-H-A Algorithm. Let us consider two

components in parallel with two components in series.

Step 1. Find out minimal path setsMinimal path sets are : {1,3,4}, {2,3,4}.

Step 2. Construct matrix P using minimal path sets. Each column of P representminimal path. Assign 1 for the component present in path set and 0 for thecomponent not present in path set.

1101

P

1110

Steps 3. Construct the design matrix D using the columns of P matrix. Startwith two columns of P matrix and apply OR operation on a respective rows andresultant column will be appended in P matrix. Perform same operation on allremaining columns. Process will be extended to three columns, four columns andso on. Once process will stop will obtain design matrix D.

1101

D

1110

.

1111

Step 4. Construct a vector S whose number of columns are same that of designmatrix D. First m elements are 1's, where m is number of columns in P matrix.Next elements(1 or -1) are determined according to rule (-1)i-1, where i is the numberof columns of P that are taken at a time to be OR' ed in particular step.

S=[1 1 -1].Step 5. Let m be the number of columns in P matrix. Construct the structurefunction of the system.

n

i

jiDi

jxjSx

m

1

,12

1.

2

3 4

Page 92: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

88

where, D(i,j)= element (i,j) of DS(j) =element j of SHere, m=2, n=4.

Structure function (x) is

4

1

,12

1

.2

i

jiDi

J

xjSx

4

1

,3

1

.i

jiDi

J

xjS

1,44

1,33

1,22

1,111 DDDD xxxxS

2,44

2,33

2,22

2,112 DDDD xxxxS

3,44

3,33

3,22

3,113 DDDD xxxxS

14

13

12

11

14

13

12

01

14

13

02

11 .1.1.1 xxxxxxxxxxxx

.4321432431 xxxxxxxxxxx

Reliability is

xER

4321432431 xxxxExxxExxxE

.4321432431 PPPPPPPPPP

.111 4321 PPPpR

4. Disussion. For last four decades, various methods have been developedto evaluate reliabiality of system. The C-H-A method has got its own importance.Being an algorithmic approach, one can write computer program and use computerto evaluate reliability of complex system. Further, the important relibility measuressuch as Birnbaum Reliability - Importance, Chaudhari bounds can also be evaluatedeasily.

REFERENCES[1] T. Aven, Reliability/availability of inherent system based on minimal cut sets, Reliability

Engineering, 13 (1986), 93-104.[2] E. Balaguruswami, Reliability Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi

(2003).[3] R.E. Barlow and F. Prokshan, Statistical Theory of Reliability and Testing, Holt, Winston Richart

(1975).[4] Gopal Chaudhari, Hu, K. and A. Nadar, A new approach to system reliability, IEEE Trans. on

Reliability, 50.No 1 (2001), 75-84.

[5] E. Charles Ebeling, Reliability and Maintainability Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill, (2000).

Page 93: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

A NOTE ON PAIRWISE SLIGHTLY SEMI-CONTINUOUS FUNCTIONSBy

M.C.Sharma and V.K.Solanki Department of Mathematics

N.R.E.C. Collage Khurja, 203131, Uttar Pradesh, India

(Received : March 15, 2007)

ABSTRACTIn this paper we introduce concept of pairwise slightly semi-cintinuous

function in bitopological spaces and discuss some of the basic properties of them.Several examples are provided of illustrate behaviour of these new classes offunctions2000 Mathematics Subject Classification : 54E55.Keywords and Phrases : (i,j) clopen set, pairwise slightly continuous, pairwiseslightly semi-continuous, pairwise almost semi-continuous, pairwise semi -

continuous, pairwise weakly semi-continuous, pairwise s- closed, pairwise ultraregular.

1. Introduction. J.C. Kelly [5] initiated the systematic study ofbitopological spaces. A set equiped with two topologies is called bitopological spaces.Continuity play an important role in topological and bitopological spaces. In 1980,R.C. Jain [4] introduced the concept of slightly continuity in topological spaces.Recently T.M. Nour [10] defined a slightly semi-continuous functions as ageneralization of slightly continuous function using semi-open sets andinvestigated its properties. In 2000, T. Noiri and G.I. Chae [9] introduce a note onslightly semi-continuous functions in topological spaces.

The object of the present paper is to introduce a new class of function calledpairwise slightly semi-continuous functions. This class contained the class ofpairwise continuous functions and that of pairwise semi continuous function.Relation between this class and other class of pairwise continuous functions areobtained.

Throughout the present paper the spaces X and Y always representbitopological spaces (X,P1,P2) and (Y,Q1,Q2) on which no seperation axioms are

assumed. Let S X. Then S is said to be (i, j) semi-open [8] if ClPS j – (Pi-

Int(S)) (where Pj–Cl(S) denoted the closure operator with respect to topology Pjand Pi–Int(S) denoted the interior operator with respect to topology Pi, (i, j=1,2,ij) and its complement is called (i, j) semi-closed. The intersection of all (i, j)semi-closed sets containing S is called the (i, j) semi-closure of S and it will be

Page 94: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

90

denoted by (i, j) s Cl(S). A subset S is said to be (i, j) semi-regular if S is both (i,j) semi-open and (i , j) semi closed. A subset S is said to (i, j) semi -open if S isthe union of (i, j) semi-regular sets and the complement of a (i, j) semi -open set iscalled (i, j) semi - closed. A subset S is said to be (i, j) clopen if S is Pi–closedand Pj–open set in X.

In this note we will denote the family of all (i, j) semi-open (resp. Pi–open,(i, j) semi-regular and (i, j) clopen of (X,P1,P2) by (i, j)SO(X)(resp. Pi-open(X),(i, j)SR(X) and (i, j)CO(X)), and denote the family of (i, j) semi-open (resp. Pi-open, (i, j)semi-regular and (i, j) clopen) set of (X,P1,P2) containing x by (i, j)SO(X,x)(resp. Pi(X,x), (i, j)SR(X,x) and (i, j)CO(X,x). i, j=1,2. ij.

2. Preliminaries.Definition 2.1. A function f:(X,P1,P2)(Y,Q1,Q2) is said to be pairwise-semicontinuous [8] (p.s.C) resp. pairwise almost semi continuous (p.a.s.C)[12] pairwisesemi -continuous (p.s.C.) [12] and pairwise weakly semi continuous (p.w.s.C.)

[12]) if for each Xx and for each xfyQV i , there exists xXSOjiU ,,

such that Qint resp. j VClQUfVUf i

VClQUfVClQUsCljif jj and , .

Definition 2.2. A function f:(X,P1,P2)(Y,Q1,Q2) is called to be pairwise almostcontinuous (p.a.C) [2] (resp. pairwise -continuous (p..C.)[1], pairwise weaklycontinuous (p.w.C)[2] if for each xX and for each VQi–(Y, f(x)), there is UPi(X,x)such that f(U) Qi–Int(Qj–Cl(V)) (resp. f(Pj–Cl(U) Qj–Cl(V), f(U) Qj–Cl(V)).Definition 2.3. [11] A function f:(X,P1,P2)(Y,Q1,Q2) is called slightly semi-continuous (p.sl.s.C.)(resp. pairwise slightly continuous (p.sl.C) if for each xXand for each V(i, j)CO(Y, f(x)), there exists U(i, j)SO(X,x) (resp. UPi(X,x)) suchthat f(U) V, i, j=1,2 and ij.

A function f:(X,P1,P2)(Y,Q1,Q2) is said to be pairwise slightly semi-continuous (resp. pairwise slightly continuous) if inverse image of each (i, j)-clopenset of Y is (i, j) semi-open (resp. Pi–open) in X; i, j=1,2, ij.

The following diagram is obtained :p. C p.a.C p..C. p.w.C p.sl.C

p.s.C p.a.s.C p..s.C p.w.s.C p.sl.s.C

diagram 1Remark 2.4. It was point out in [11] that pairwise slightly continuity impliespairwise slighltly semi-continuity, but not conversely. Its counter examples are notgiven in it.

Page 95: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

91

Example 2.5. Let X={a, b, c}, P1={,X, {a},{b},{a,b}}, P2={,X, {a},{a,b}} andlet Q1={, X, {a}}, Q2={, Y, {b,c}}. Then the mapping f:(X,P1,P2)(Y,Q1,Q2) ispairwise slihtly semi-continuous but not pairwise slightly continuous for f–1({a})is (j, i) semi-open and (i, j) semi-closed, but not Pi –closed in (X,P1,P2).Theorem 2.6. The pairwise set-connectedness and the pairwise slightly continuityare equivalent for a surjeetive function.Proof. A surjection f:(X,P1,P2)(Y,Q1,Q2) is pairwise set-connected if and only iff–1(F) is (i, j) clopen in X for each (i, j) clopen set F of Y. It is easy to prove that afunction f:(X,P1,P2)(Y,Q1,Q2) is pairwise slightly continuous if and only if f–1(F)is P1–open in X for each (i, j) clopen set F of Y. Therefore, the proof is obvious.Theorem 2.7. For a function f:(X,P1,P2)(Y,Q1,Q2) the following are equivalent:

(a) f is pairwise slightly semi-continuous,(b) f–1(V)(i, j)SO(X) for each V(i, j)CO(Y),(c) f–1(V) is (j, i) semi-open and (i, j) semi-closed for each V(i, j)CO(Y).3. Properties of pairwise slightly semi-continuity.

Theorem 3.1. The following are equivalent for a function f:(X,P1,P2)(Y,Q1,Q2):(a) f is pairwise slightly semi-continuous,(b) For each xX and for each (V)(i, j)CO(Y,f(x)), there exists U(i, j)

SR(X,x) such that f(U) V,(c) For each xX and for each (V)(i, j)CO(Y, f(x)), there is U(i, j)

SO(X,x) such that f(i, j)sCl(U)) V.Proof. (a) (b). Let xX and V(i, j)CO(Y, f(x)). By Theorem 2.7, we have f–1(V)(i,j)SR(X,x). Put U=f–1(V)), then xU and f(U) V.

(b) (c). It is obvious and is thus omitted.(c) (a). If U(i, j)SO(X), then (i, j)sCl(U)(i, j)SO(X).

Definition 3.2. A bitopological space (X,P1,P2) is called(a) Pairwise semi-T2[6] (resp. pairwise ultra Hausdorff or pairwise UT2) iffor each pair of distinct points x, y of X, there exists a P1–semi-open (resp. P1–clopen) set U and a P2–semi-open (resp. P2–clopen) set V such that xU, yV andUV=.(b) Pairwise s-normal[7] (resp.pairwise ultra normal) if for every Pi-closedset A and Pj-closed set B such that AB=, there exist USO(X) (resp Co(X,Pj)and VSO(X,Pi)(resp.CO(X,Pi)such that A U, B V and UV=where i, j=1,2,ij(c) Pairwise s-closed (resp.pairwise mildly compact) if every (i,j) semi regular(resp.(i, j) clopen) cover of (X,P1,P2) has a finite subcover. i, j=1,2 and ij.Theorem 3.3. If f : (X,P1,P2)(Y,Q1,Q2) is a pairwise slightly semi-continuousinjection and Y is pairwise UT2 ,then X is pairwise semi-T2.

Page 96: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

92

Proof. Let x1,x2X and x1x2. Then since f is injective and Y is pairwise UT2, f(x1)f(x2) and there exist, V1,V2(i, j)CO(Y) such that f(x1)V1, f(x2)V2 and V1V2=.By Theorem 2.7, xif-1(Vi)(i, j)SO(X) for i=1,2 and f-1(V1)f-1(V2)=. Thus X ispairwise semi-T2.Theorem 3.4. If f:(X,P1,P2)(Y,Q1,Q2) is a pairwise slightly semi-continuous,P2-closed injection and Y is pairwise ultra normal, then X is pairwise s-normal.Proof. Let F1 and F2 be disjoint (P1,P2)-closed subsets of X. Since f is P2-closedand injective, f(F1) and f(F2) are disjoint (Q1,Q2)-closed subsets of Y. Since Y ispairwise ultra normal, f(F1) and f(F2) are separeted by disjoint Pi–clopen sets V1and Pj-clopen V2, respectively. Hence Fif–1(Vi), f

-1(Vi)(i, j)SO(X) for i=1,2 fromTheorem 2.7 and f-1(V1)f-1(V2)=. Thus X is pairwise s-normal.Theorem 3.5. If f:(X,P1,P2)(Y,Q1,Q2) is a pairwise slightly semi-continuoussurjection and (X,P1,P2) is pairwise s-closed, then Y is pairwise mildly compact.Proof. Let {V|V(i,j )CO(Y), } be a cover of Y. Since f is pairwise slightly

semi-continuous, by the Theorem 2.7 {f-1(V)| } is a (i, j) semi-regular cover

of X and so there is a finite subset 0 of such that 0

1

VfX .

Therefore,

0

VY

since f is surjective. Thus Y is pairwise mildly compact.Theorem 3.6 If f:(X,P1,P2)(Y,Q1,Q2) is pairwise slightly semi-continuous andY is pairwise UT2, then the graph G(f) of f is (i, j) semi -closed in the bitopologicalproduct space X×Y.Proof. Let (x,y) G(f), then y f(x). Since Y is pairwise UT2, there exist V(i, j)CO(Y, y) and W(i, j) CO(Y, f(X)) such that VW=Since f is pairwise slightlysemi-continuous, by the Theorem 2.7 there exist U(i, j) SR (X, x) and V(i, j)CO(Y, y), (x,y) U V and U V (i,j)SR(X Y). Hence G(f) is (i, j) semi - closed.Theorem 3.7. If f : (X, P1, P2)(Y, Q1, Q2) is pairwise slightly semi-continuousand (Y, Q1, Q2) is pairwise UT2, then A={(X1,X2) f(x1)=f(x2) } is )(i, j)semi -closed in the bitopological product space X X.Proof. Let (X1,X2) A. Then f(x1)f(x2). Since Y is pairwise UT2, there exist V1(i, j) CO(Y, f(X1)) and V2 (i, j) CO(Y, f(X2)) such that V1V2=. Since f is pairwiseslightly semi-continuous, there exist U1,U2 (i, j)SR(X) such that X1U1 andf(U1)V1 for i=1,2. Therefore, (X1,X2)U1U2 , U1U2(i, j) SR(XX), and (U1U2)A=. So A is (i, j) semi -closed in bitopological product space X×X.Definition 3.8. [3] A bitopological(X, P1, P2) is said to be pairwise extremally

Page 97: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

93

disconnected if P2 -closure of each P1-open set of (X, P1, P2) is P1-openLemma 3.9. Let (X, P1, P2) be pairwise exteremally disconnected space, then U(i, j)SR(X) if and only if U(i, j)CO(X),i,j=1,2 and ij.Proof. Let U(i, j)SR(X). Since U(i, j)SO(X),Pj-Cl (U)=Pj-Cl(Pi-Int (U) and soPi-Cl(U) Pi(X). Since U is (i, j) semi-closed , Pi-Int(U) =U= Pj-Cl (U) and hence Uis (i, j) clopen. The convers is obvious.Theorem 3.10. If f:(X,P1,P2)(Y,Q1,Q2) is pairwise slightly semi-continuous,and X is pairwise extremally disconnected then f is pairwise slightly continuous.Proof. Let xX and V(i, j)CO(Y,f(x)). Since f is pairwise slightly semi-continuousby Theorem 2.7, there exists U(i, j)SR(X,x) such that f(U) V, since X is pairwiseextremally disconnected by the Lemma 3.9,U(i, j) CO (X) and hence f is pairwiseslightly continous.Difinition 3.11. A function f : (X, P1, P2)(Y, Q1, Q2) is called pairwise almoststrongly -semi continuous (p,a..s.C.) if for each x X and for each V Qi(Y,f(x)),there exists U(i, j)SO(X,x) such that f((i, j) sCl(U)) (i, j)sCl(V) (resp.f((i, j)sCl(U))V).Theorem 3.12. If f:(X,P1,P2)(Y,Q1,Q2) is pairwise slightly semi-continuous and(Y, Q1, Q2) is pairwise extremally disconnected, then f is pairwise almost strogly-semi-continuous.Proof. Let xX and VQi(Y,f(x)), then (i, j) sCl(V) = Qi -Int(Qj-Cl(V)) is (i, j) regularopen in (Y, Q1, Q2). Since Y is pairwise extremally disconnected, (i, j) sCl(V)(i, j)CO(Y). Since f is pairwise slightly semi-continuous, by Theorem 3.1, there existsU (i, j) SO(X, x) such that f((i, j)sCl(U)(i, j)sCl(V)). So f is pairwise almoststrongly -semi-continuous.Corollary3.13. [11] If f:(X,P1,P2)(Y,Q1,Q2) is pairwise slightly semi-continuousand (Y, Q1, Q2) is pairwise extremally disconnected. Then f is pairwise weaklysemi-continuous.Difinition 3.14. A bitopological space (X, P1, P2) is called pairwise ultra regularif for each UPi(X) and for each xU, there exists O(i, j) CO (X) such that xOU.Theorem 3.15. If f : (X, P1, P2)(Y, Q1, Q2) is pairwise slightly semi-continuousand (Y,Q1,Q2) is pairwise ultra regular, then f is pairwise stroghly -semi-continuous.Proof. Let xX and VQi(Y,f(X)). Since (Y,Q1,Q2) is pairwise ultra regular, thereis W(i,j)CO(Y) such that f(x)WV. Since f is pairwise slightly semi-continuous,bythe Theorem 3.1 there is U(i,j)SO(X,x) such that f((i, j)sCl(U))W and sof(i,j)sCl(U))V. Thus f is strongly -semi-continuous.We have to the following diagram:

p.C

Page 98: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

94

P.C P.a.C P..C P.w.C P. sl.C P.s.C P.a.s.C P.s..C P.w.s.C P. sl.s.C P.st..s.C P.st..s.C

REFERENCES[1] S.Bose, Almost open sets, almost closed, -continuous and almost quasi compact mapping in

bitopological spaces, Bull, Cal. Math.Soc; 73 (1981),345-354.

[2] S.Bose and D. Sinha, Pairwise almost continuous map and weakly continuous map in bitopologicalspaces, Bull, Cal. Math.Soc., 74 (1982), 195-206.

[3] M.C.Datta, J.Austr. Math. Soc, 14(1972) 119-128.

[4] R.C.Jain, The Role of Regularly Open Sets in General Topology, Ph.D. Thisis, Meerut University,Institute of Advanced Studies, Meerut, India(1980).

[5] J.C. Kelly, Bitopological spaces, Proc. London Math. Soc., 13 (1961),71-89.

[6] S.N. Maheshwari and R. Prasad, Some new separation axioms in bitopological spaces, Mathematica;12 (27) (1975), 159-162.

[7] S.N. Maheshwari and R. Prasad, On pairwise s-normal sapces, Kyungpook Math. J., 15 (1975), 37-40.

[8] S.N. Maheshwari and R. Prasad, On pairwise irresolute functions, Mathematica, 18 (1976), 169-172.

[9] T.Noiri and G.I.Chae, A note on slightly semi-continuous functions, Bull. Cal. Math. Soc., 92(2)(2000), 87-92.

[10] T.M.Nour,Slightly semi-continuous functions, Bull. Cal. Math. Soc, 87 (1995), 187-190.

[11] M.C. Sharma and V.K.Solanki, Pairwise slightly semi-continuous function in bitopological spaces.[communicated]

[12] V.K.Solanki, Almost semi-continuous mapping in bitopological spaces .The Mathematics EducationXLII, No. 3 (To appear)

Page 99: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

FIXED POINT THEOREMS FOR AN ADMISSIBLE CLASS OFASYMPTOTICALLY REGULAR SEMIGROUPS IN LP- SPACES

ByG.S. Saluja

Department of Mathematics and I.T.,Government College of Science, Raipur-492010, Chhattisgarh

E-mail: [email protected](Received : June 15, 2008)

ABSTRACTThe aim of this paper is to prove existence of fixed point of an admissible

class of asymptotically regular semigroup Ts in LP-space 21 p satisfying the

condition:

GsxTyyTxcyTyxTxbyxayTxT sssssssss , 22

where as, bs and cs are non-negative constants satisfying certain conditions. Ourresult extends and improves the result of Ishihara [10], Ishihara and Taka-hashi[11,12] and many others.2000 Mathematics subject classification No : 46B20,47H10.

Keywords: Asymptotic regularity, fixed point, LP-space 21 p

1. Introduction. Let K be a nonempty subset of a Banch space E and

KKT : be a nonlinear mapping. The mapping T is said to be Lipschitzian if

there exists a positive constant kn such that

, yxkyTxT nnn

for all Kyx , and for all .Nn A Lipschitzian mapping is said to be nonexpansive

if 1nk for all .Nn uniformly k-Lipschitzian if kkn for all .Nn , and

asymptotically nonexpansive if ,1lim

nn

k respectively. These mappings were first

studied by Goebel and Kirk [7] and Goebel, Kirk and Thele [9]. Lifschitz [14] proved

that in a Hillbert space a uniformly k-Lipschitzian mappings with 2k has a

fixed point. Downing and Ray [5] and Ishihara and Takahashi [12] prove that in a

Hilbert space a uniformly k-Lipschitzian semigroup with 2k has a common

fixed point. Casini and Maluta [4] and Ishihara and Takahashi [11] proved that auniformly k-Lipschitzian semigroup in a Banach space E has a common fixed pointif k<N(E), where N(E) is the constant of uniformly normal structure.

Page 100: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

96

In these results, the domain of semigroups were assumed to be closed andconvex. Ishihara [10] gave the fixed point theorem for Lipschizian semigroups inboth Banach and Hilbert spaces in which closedness and convexity of domin werenot needed.

The concept of asymptotic regularity is due to Browder and Petryshyn [2].A mapping EET : is said to be asymptotically regular if

,0lim 1

xTxT nn

n

for all ., Eyx

It is well known that if T is nonexpansive then TttITt 1 is asymptoti-

cally regular for all 0<t<1.Now we consider the following class of mappings, whose nth iterate Tn

satisfies the following condition:

xTyyTxcyTyxTxbyxayTxT nnn

nnnn

nn . 22

for all Cyx , and n=1,2,... where nn ba , and nc are nonnegative constants

satisfying certain conditions. This class of mappings is more general than theclass of nonexpansive, asymptotically nonexpansive, Lipschizian and uniformlyk-Lipschitzian mappings. The above facts can be seen by taking bn=cn=0. The aimof this paper is to prove a fixed point theorem for the above said class of

asymptotically regular semigroups in LP-space .21 p Our result extends and

improves the results of Ishihara [10], Ishihara and Takahashi [11,12] and manyothers.

2. Preliminaries. Let G be a semitopological semigroup, that is, G is a

semigroup with a Hausdorff topology such that for each Ga the mapping ass

and sas from G to G are continuous. A Semitopological semigroup G is leftreversible if any two closed right ideals of G have nonempty intersection. In this

case, ,G is a directed system when the binary relation" " on G is defined by a

b if and only if .bGbaGa Examples of left reversible semigroups include

commutative and all left amenable semigroups.

Let K be a nonempty subset of a Banach space E. Let GtTS t : be a

family of mappings from K into itself. Then S is said to be an admissible class ofasymptotically regular semigroup on K if it satisfying the following:

(2) for each ,Kx the mapping xTxs s, from KG into K is

Page 101: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

97

continuous when KG has the product topology,

(3) for each ,Kx ,Gh

,0lim xTxT tht

t

(4) for each Gs

(2.0.1) GsxTyyTxcyTyxTxbyxayTxT sssssssss , 22

for all ,, Kyx where ss ba , and sc are non-negative constants satisfying certain

conditions.

Let AB : be a decreasing net of bounded subsets of a Banach space E.

For a nonempty subset K of E, define

;:supinf, ByyxxBr

;:,inf, KxxBrKBr

.,,:, KBrxBrKxKBA

We know that ,.Br is a continuous convex function on E which satisfies

the following:

yBrxBryxyBrxBr ,,,,

for each ., Eyx It is easy to see that E is reflexive and K is closed convex, then

KBA , is nonempty, and moreover, if E is uniformly convex, then it consists

of a single point (cf. [15]).Let p>1 and denote by the number in [0,1] and by Wp( ) the function

.11 pp

The functional p. is said to be uniformly convex (cf.[25]) on the Banach

space E if there exists a positive constant cp such that for all ]1,0[ and Eyx ,

following inequality holds:

.11 ppp

ppp yxcWyxyx

In Hilbert space H, the following equality holds:

,111 2222 yxyxyx ...(**)

for all Hyx , and ].1,0[

Page 102: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

98

If ,21 p then we have for all x,y in LP and ],1,0[ the following

inequality holds:

(2.0.2) 2222 1111 yxpyxyx

(The inequality (2.0.2) is contained in [17]).

Xu [24] proved that the functional p. is uniformly convex on the whole

Banach space E if and only if E is p-uniformly convex, that is, there exists a constantc>0 such that the modulus of convexity (see[8])

forc pE all .20

The normal structure coefficient N(E) of E is defined by Bynum [3] as follows:

KrdiamK

ENK

inf K is a bounded convex subset of E consisting of more than

one point] where

diam K= Kyxyx ,:sup

is the diameter of K and

yxKrKyKx

K supinf

is the Chebyshev radius of K relative to itself.

The space E is said to have uniformly notmal structure if .1EN It is

known that a uniformly convex Banach space has uniformly normal structure

and for a Hilbert space H,N(H)= .2 Recently, Pichugov [18] (cf. Prus [20] calculated

that

.1,2,2min /1/1 pLN pppP

Some estimates for normal structure coefficient in other Banach spaces

may be found in Prus [21]. For a subset K, we denote by Kco the closure of the

convex hull of K.3. Main Result. In this section, we give our main result:

Theorem 3.1. Let E be a LP- space Kp ,21 a nonempty subset of E,G

a left reversible semitopological semigoup and GtTS t : be an admissible class

of asymptotically regular semigroup on K satisfying the condition:

GsxTyyTxcyTyxTxbyxayTxT sssssssss , 22 ...(*)

Page 103: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

99

for all ,, kyx where as, bs and cs are non-negative constants satisfying certain

conditions such that

1

2.

12114 2

12

Npp

where

ssa ,suplim

ssc . suplim

Suppose that GtyTt : is bounded for some Ky and there exists a closed

subset C of K such that CstxTco ts : for all .Kx Then there exists a zC

such that zzTs for all sG.

Proof. Let stxTcoxB ts ; and let s s xBxB for Gs and .Kz Define

0: nxn by induction as follows:

,0 yx ,, 11 nnsn xBxBAx for 1n

since KCxB for all nxKx , is well defined. Let

,, mmsm xBxBrr

,, 1 mmsm xBxBrD .1m

Now for each Gts , and ,, Kyx we have

yTxTxTTycyTyxTTxTbyxayTxTT sttssststsssts ..22

and so

(3.0.3) ..22 xTTxTxTycyTyxTTxTbyxayTxTT tsttsststsssts

yTyyxT st .

Then from 11 mttmm xBxBx and a result of Ishihara and Taka-

hashi [11], we have

(3.04) mssmmsm xBdiamN

xBxBrr inf1

,

Now using (3.0.4), we have

sbaxTxTxBdiam mbmas

mss

,:supinfinf

Page 104: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

100

mtms

stxTxTsuplimsuplim

mtmst

stxTxTTsuplimsuplim

mtmmstmstmms

stxTxxTTxTbxxTat .suplimsuplim 2

2/1. mstmmtmst xTTxxTxTc

tmtmmstmstmms

stcxTxxTTxTbxxTat .suplimsuplim 2

2/1. mstmsmsmmtmmms xTTxTxTxxTxxxT

Taking the s assuplim and by asymptotic regularity of T, we get

2/12supliminf mmtmmmt

mss

DxTxDDxBdiam .

Again taking the , assuplim t we get

,2inf 2/1mms

sDxBdiam

and hance using (3.0.4), we have

(3.0.5)

,2 2/1

mm DN

r

where

,suplim tt

a tt

csuplim

and N is the normal structure coefficient of E.Again from (2.0.2) and (3.0.3), we have

211

211 111 mtmmsmtm xTxpxTxTx

21

21 1 msmtmsm xTxTxTx

21

21 1 mstmtmsm xTTxTxTx

121 msm xTx mtsmsmtmtmsmt xTTxTxTxbxTxa 11

21

Page 105: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

101

1111 mtmmmsmstmsmsmt xTxxxTxTTxTxTxc .

Taking the s assuplim and by asymptotic regularity of T, we have

11222

112 111 mtmmmtmtmmtmm xTxrrcrarxTxpr .

Again taking the , assup t we have

1222

12 111 mmmmmmm DrrarrDpr

or,

.111

122

12

mmmmmm DrrrDpr

Letting ,1 we get

122

12 1 mmmmm DrrDpr

or,

011 22 mm rtrtptF ,

where .1 mDt

It can be easily seen that

0tF for all t .

121142

mrpp

It follows from (3.0.5) that

.

212

114 2/12

1 mm DNp

pD

Hence,

1,.1 mDBD mm

where

,1

212

114 2/12

Np

pB

by the assumption of the theorem. Since

mmsmmsmm xxBrxxBrxx ,, 11

mm Dr

mD2

Page 106: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

102

...

...

02 11 DBm as ,m

it follows that mx is a Cauchy sequerce. .lim Let mm xz Then we have

zTxTxTxxzzTz smsmsmms

2/12 .. mssmssmsmsmsmsmm xTzxTxczTzxTxbzxaxTxxz

2/12 . msmmsmssmsmsmsmsmm xTxxzzTzzxczTzxTxbzxaxTxxz

2/12mmsmssmsmsmm DxzzTzzxczTzDbzxaDxz

Taking the limit as m each side, we have

mszTz lim zTzDbzxaDxz smsmsmm

2(

0) 2/1 mmsms DxzzTzzxc

for all .Gs Hence we have zzTs for all .Gs This completes the proof.

As a direct consequence of Theorem 3.1, we have the following results:

Corollary 3.1. Let E be a LP- space Kp ,21 a nonempty subject of E,

and KKT : be a self mapping satisfying the condition:

xTyyTxcyTyxTxbyxayTxT nnn

nnnn

nn ..22

for all Kyx , and ,1n where nn ba , and nc are nonnegative constatnt satisfying

certain conditions. Suppose that 1: nyT n is bounded for some Ky and there

exists a closed subset C of K such that CnkxTco kn : for all .Kx If

,1

212

114 2/12

Npp

where

nna ,suplim

nnc ,suplim

then there exists a point z in C such that Tz=z.By Therorem 3.1 and equation (**), we immediately obtain the following:Theorem 3.2: Let E be a Hillbert space, K a nonempty subset of E, G a left

reversible semitopological semigoup and GtTS t : be an admissible class of

Page 107: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

103

asymptotically regular semigroup on K satisfying the condition:

GsxTyyTxcyTyxTxbyxayTxT sssssssss ,22

for all ,, Kyx where ss ba , and sc are non-negative constants satisfying certain

conditions such that

1

2

2.

214 2

12

where

s

sa ,suplim

s

sc ,suplim

Suppose that GtyTt : is bounded for some Ky and there exists a closed

subset C of K such that CstxTco ts : for all .Kx Then there exists a

Cz such that zzTs for all .Gs

If we put 0 ss cb and 2ss ka in inequality (*) of Theorem 3.1, we get the

following results as corollary:Corollary 3.2 (see[ [10], Theorem1): Let K be a nonempty subset of a Hillbert

space H,G a left reversible semitopological semigroup, and GtTS t : a

Lipschitzian semigroup on K with .2suplim ss k Suppose that GtyTt : is

bounded for some Ky and there exists a closed subset C of K such that

CstxTco ts : for all .Kx Then there exists a Cz such that zzTs for

all .GsRemark 1. Theorem 3.2 extends and improves the corresponding results

of Ishihara [10], Ishihara and Takahashi [11] and Downing and Ray [5]. The reasonis that the above authors have considered Lipschitzian of uniformly Lipschitziansemigroups in Hilbert space whereas we consider asymptotically regular semigroupsatisfying the condition (*) which is more general than Lipschitzian or uniformlyLipschitzain semigroups.

Remark 2. Our results also extend several known results given in theliterature.

REFERENCES[1] J. Barros-Neto, An Introduction to the Theory of Distributions, Pure and Applied Mathematics, 14,

Marcel Dekker, New York, 1973.[2] F.E. Browder and V. W. Petryshyn, The solution of nonlinear functional equations in Banach

spaces, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc., 72(1966), 571-576.

Page 108: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

104

[3] W.L. Bynum, Normal structure coefficient for Banach space Pacific J. Math., 86 (1980), 427-436.[4] E. Casini and E. Maluta, Fixed points of unifromly lipschitizian mappings in spaces with uniformly

normal structure, Nonlinear Anal. TMA 9 (1985), 103-108.[5] D.J. Dowing and W.O. Ray, Uniformly Lipschitzian semigroups in Hilbert space, Canad. Math. Bull.,

25 No. 2 (1982) 210-214.[6] N. Dunford and J.T. Schwartz, Linear Operators, I. General Theory, Pure and Applied Mathematics,Vol

7 Intersciences Publishers, New York (1958).[7] K. Goebel and W.A. Kirk, A fixed point theorem for transformations whose iterates have unifromly

Lipschitz constant, Studia Math, 47 (1973), 135-140.[8] K. Goebel and W.A. Kirk, Topics in metric fixed point theory, Cambridge Stud. Adv. Math. 28

Cambridge University Press, London, 1990.[9] K. Goebel, W.A. Kirk and R.L. Thele, Uniformly Lipschitzian families of transformations in Banach

Spaces, Canad. J. Math., 26 (1974), 1245-1256.[10] H. Ishihara, Fixed point theorems for Lipschitzian semigroups, Canad. Math. Bull., 32 No.1 (1989),

90-97.[11] H. Ishihara and W. Takahashi, Fixed point theorems for uniformly Lipschitzian semigroups in

Hilbert spaces, J. Math. Anal. Appl. 127 no. 1 (1987) 206-210.[12] H. Ishihara and W. Takahashi, Modulus of convexity, characteristics of convexity and fixed point

theorems, Kodai Math. J. 10 no. 2 (1987) 197-208.[14] E.A. Lifschits, Fixed point theorems for operators in strongly convex spaces (Russian) Voronez. Gos.

Univ. Trudy Mat. Fak. 16 (1975), 23-28.[15] T.C. Lim, On asymptotic centers and fixed points of nonexpansive mappings, Canad. J. Math., 32 no.

2 (1980) 421-430.[16] T.C. Lim, On some LP inqualities in best approximation theory, J. Math. Anal. Appl., 154 (1991),

523-528.[17] T.C. Lim, H.K. Xu and Z.B. Zu, An Lp inequality and its applications to fixed point theory and

approximation theory in progress in Approximation Theory, P. Neval and A. Pikus (eds.) AcademicPress, New York 1991, 609-624.

[18] S.A. Pichugove, The Jung constant of the space Lp, Mat. Zametki, 43 No.5 (1988), 604-614,Translation in Math. Notes, 43 (1988), 348-354.

[19] B. Prus and R. Smarzewski, Strongly unique best approximations and centers in uniformly convexspaces, J. Math. Anal. Appl. 121 no. 1 (1987), 10-21.

[20] B. Prus, On Bynum's fixed point theorems, Atti. Sem. Mat. Fis. Univ. Modena, 38 No. 2 (1990), 535-

545.[21] B. Prus, Some estimates for the normal structure coefficients in Banach spaces, Rend Circ. Mat.

Palermo (2) 40 1 (1991) 128-135.[22] R. Smarzewski, Strongly unique best approximation in Banach spaces, II J. Approx. Theory 51

No.2 (1987), 202-217.[23] R. Smarzewski. On an inequalityi of Bynum and Drew, J. Math. Anal. Appl. 150 No. 1 (1990), 146-

150.[24] H.K. Xu, Inequality in Banach spaces with applications, Nonlinear Anal. 16 No. 12 (1991), 1127-

1138.

[25] C. Zalinescu, On uniformly convex function, J. Math. Anal. Appl., 95 (1983), 344-374.

Page 109: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

105

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

SOME INTEGRAL FORMULAS INVOLVING A GENERAL SEQUENCEOF FUNCTIONS, A GENERAL CLASS OF POLYNOMIALS AND THE

MULTIVARIABLE H-FUNCTIONBy

V.G. GuptaDepartment of Mathematics,

University of Rajasthan, Jaipur-302004, Rajasthan, India and

Suman JainS.S. Jain Subodh Postgraduate College, Jaipur-302004, Rajasthan, Indian

(Received : August 14, 2008)

ABSTRACTIn this paper we establish four integral formulas involving a general

sequence of functions, a general class of polynomials and the multivariable H-function. The results established here are quite general in nature from which onecan derive a large number of (known and new) integrals by specializing theparameters suitably of the various functions involved therein.2000 Mathematics Subject Classification No : Primerey... secondaryKeywords: General sequence of functions, General class of polynomials.Multivariable H-function.

1. Introduction. Srivastava and Panda [c.f.,e.g., [10], [15], [16] and [17]introduced the multivariable H-function in a series of papers defined andrepresented in the following contracted notation ([15], p. 130)

r

r

qrj

rjqjjQ

rjjj

prj

rjpjjp

rjjj

rrr

rrr ddb

cca

z

z

qpqpQpnmnmN

HzzH,1,1

'',1

';

,1,1''

,1'

;1

1,1

111 ,;...;,,...,

,;...;,,...,

;...;:,,;...;,:,0

,...,1

1 (1.1)

to denote the H-function of r complex variables rzz ,...,1 . See Srivastava, Gupta

and Goyal ([18], p.251, Eq.(4.17)) for details of this function.A general class of polynomials occurring in this paper was introduced by

Srivastava [[20], p.158, eq.(1.1)] defined by

mn

k

kkn

mk nxAkn

xnm

S/

0, ,...2,1,0,

! ...(1.2)

where m is arbitrary positive integer and the coefficients 0,, knA kn are arbitary

constants, real or complex.

Page 110: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

106

By suitably specializing the coefficients knA , the polynomial xSmn can be

reduced to the well known polynomials. These include among others, the Jacobi,Hermite, Legendre, Tchebycheff, Laguerre polynomials.

Agarwal and Chaubey [1], Srivastava and Manocha [21], Salim [13] andseveral others have studied a general sequence of functions. In the present paperwe shall study the following useful series formula for a general sequence of functions

hetuv

sn xhetuvqpdcbaxR

,,,,

, ,,,,,;,;,,,; ...(1.3)

where

n

v

v

u

n

t

t

e

q

hhetuv

ptvhqknsxdc

0 0 0 0 0,,,,

,1, ...(1.4)

and

!!!!!

,,,, ' hetuvktvdcakb

hetuvn

tcuhvnhvtntn

ve

hveht

kqupe

tnvnn

11

...(1.5)

By suitably specializing the parameters involved in (1.3) a general sequence offunction reduced to generalized polynomial set studied by Raizada [11], a class ofpolynomials introduced by Fujiwara [5], a well known Jacobi polynomials given inRainville [10] and several others.

2. Main Integrals. In this section we establish four main integrals.First Integral

btat

tSbtatt m

n21

0

,;,;,,',',, qpgfdcbtat

tR BA

D

dtzbtat

tz

btatt

H r

r

,...,1

1

s

hewvu

mn

nm bahewvuA

n

21

,,,,

/

0, ,,,,

!

Page 111: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

107

rbazbazH r22

11

,, ,...,1

...(2.1)

where

rr

rrr qpqpQp

nmnmNHzzH

;...;:1,1,;...;,:1,0

,...,1,1

111

1,,

r

r

qrj

rjqjjQ

rjjjr

prj

rjpjj

P

rjjjr

rddbs

ccas

z

z

,1,1''

,1'

1

,1,1''

,1

'1

1

,;...;,:,...,;(),,...,;1

,;...;,:,...,;(),,...,;23

1

1

...(2.2)

Provided a,b, , and ri ,...,11 are all positive Re 0 and

r

iiis

1

021

Re

where

0Remin1

ij

ij

ji

di ...(2.3)

The infinite series occurring on the right hand side of (2.1) converages absolutely.

Also hewvu ,,,, is given by (1.5).

Second Integral

,;,;,,',';,/10

1 qpgfdcx

xtR

xxt

nm

Sextx BAD

xt

dxzx

xtz

xxt

H r

r

,...,1

1

hewvu

mn s

nmt t

An

hewvuet,,,,

/

0,

/1

!,,,,

rzt

zt

Hr

,...,12

,,

1

...(2.4)

where

rr

rr

nmnmNqpqpQpr HzzH ,;...;,:1,0

,;...;:1,112

,,11

1,1,...,

Page 112: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

108

r

r

qrj

rjqjjQ

rjjj

prj

rjpjjP

rjjjr

rddb

ccas

z

z

,1,1''

,1'

,1,1''

,1'

11

,;...;,:,...,;(

,;...;,:,...,;(),,...,;1

1

1

...(2.5)

r

iiis

1

0Re,0Re,0Re

Third Integral

1

0

1

0 11

111

11

11

xy

y

n

mS

yx

xy

xy

yy

xy

x

,;;,,',';11, pgfdc

xy

yR BA

D

dxdyzxy

y

xy

xz

xy

yy

xy

xH r

rr

11

11,...,

11

11

1

11

rr

hewvu

mn

nm zzzHhewvuA

n ,...,,,,,,! 1

3,,,

,,,,

/

0,

...(2.6)

where

rr

rr

nmnmNqpqpQPr HzzH ,;...;,:2,0

,;...;:1,213

,,,11

1,1,...,

,

,;...;,,,...,;(,...,,1(

,;...;,,,...,;(,,...,.1),,...,;1

,1,1''

,1'

11

,1,1''

,1'

111

1

1

r

r

qrj

rjqjjQ

rjjjrr

prj

rjpjjP

rjjjrr

r

ddbs

ccas

z

z

...(2.7)

where riii ,...,10,,,

and

r

iii

r

iii s

11

0Re,0Re

[ i is given by (2.3)]

Fourth Integral

1

0

1

0 ,11 ,;,;,,',';1111 qpgfdcyRySyxyxyf BA

Dmn

Page 113: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

109

dxdyzyxyzyxyH rrrr 11,...,11 1

111

hewvu

mn

rnm rrzzzzHhewvuA

n

,,,,

/

01

1

0 4

,,,, 1,...,1,,,,!

11

dzzzf s 11 ...(2.8)

where

rrzzzzH r

1,...,1 111

4,,,

rr

rr

qpqpQpnmnmN

H;...;:1,2

,;...;,:2,0

1,1

11

,

,;...;,,,...,;(,...,;1(

,;...;,,,...,;(,,...,.1),,...,;1

1

1

,1,1''

,1'

11

,1,1''

,1'

111

1

1

11

r

r

r qrj

rjqjjQ

rjjjrr

prj

rjpjjP

rjjjrr

rddbs

ccas

zz

zz

...(2.9)

Provided that f(z) is so chosen that the integral (2.8) exists, riii ,...,10,,,

and

r

iii

r

iii s

11

0Re,0Re

where i is given by (2.3)

Proof. To establish (2.1) express the general class of polynomial ,xSmn general

sequence of function ,;,;,,,,, qpdcbaxR BAD on the left hand side of (2.1) by its

series (1.2) and (1.3) respectively and the multivariable H-function in terms ofMellin-Barnes type contour integral with the help of (1.1). Change the order ofintegration and summation (which is easily seen to be justifiable due to the absoluteconvergence of the integral and sums involved in the process) under the conditionsmentioned with (2.1) and then evaluate the resulting t-integral with the help of(2.10) a known result given by Gradshteyn and Rayzhik ([7], p.289, 3, 197(7)).

2121

021

badxbxxx

[where 0Re ] ...(2.10)

and then interpreting the result with the help of (1.1) we thus easily arrive at the

Page 114: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

110

right-hand side of (2.1).The proof of the formulas (2.4), (2.6) and (2.8) are similar to (2.1) in which

we use the following results ([7],p. 339, eqn. 3.471(3); [3],p. 145-243)

txtetdxextx /1/1

0 1 ...(2.11)

1

0

1

0 111 ,111 Bdydxxyyxy ...(2.12)

1

0

1

0 11 11 dydxyyxxyf

dzzzfB 11

0 1, ...(2.13)

instead of (2.10).3. Special Cases.

(i) On setting g=p=1 and replacing fBB , by and let 1' nk in (2.1), we

get an integral involving general class of polynomials, generalized polynomial setand the multivariavle H-function

btat

tSbtatt m

n1

0 21

kdcq

btatt

S BAD ,,',',,,;,,

rzbtat

tz

btatt

Hr

,...,1

1

dt

hewvu

mn sn

m bahewuvAn

,,,,

/

0

21, ,,,,

!

rbazbazH r22

11

,, ,...,1

...(3.1)

The integral (3.1) is valid under same conditions as given for Integral (2.1) andwhere

!!!!!

1'',,,,1 hewuv

Awvckdhewvu weu

vwwnwD

Dv

DDve

e Dvk

queD

BwADA

1

Page 115: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

111

and .wvhqkDs

On applying the same procedure as above in (2.4), (2.6) and (2.8), we can establishthree other integrals.

(ii) If we set 1,0'' qkcdD and 0 in our special case (i)

then the generalized polynomial set reduces to unity and we arrive at the resultobtained by Gupta [8].

(iii) Taking 1,0 0,0 An in special case (ii), we arrive at the results obtained

by Chandel and Jain ([2], p. 1421, eqn. (2.1), (2.4), (2.5) and (2.6)).(iv) Also, the result (2.8) is capable of yielding certain double integrals by anappropriate choice of f(z). Let us take

; 13.2,,, 1211211 inzFzzf

substituting this value of f(z) and evaluating the Integral thus obtained on theright hand side of (2.8), we get the following integral using a result in Erdelyi et al([4], p.399, eqn.(4)):

1

0

1

0 121121111 ;;,1111 xyFyxyx

,;,;,,',';11 , qpgfdcyRyS BAD

mn

dxdyzyxyzyxyH rrr 11,...,11 1

11

hewvu

mn

rnm zzzHhewvuA

n

,,,,

/

021

5,,,,,1, ,...,,,,,,

! 21

where

rr

rr

nmnmNqpqpQPr HzzH ,;...;,:3,0

,;...;:2,315

,,,,,11

1,121,...,

,,...,1(,,...,.1),,...,;1

111

111

rr

rr

rs

s

z

z

r

r

qrj

rjqjjQ

rjjjrr

prj

rjpjjP

rjjjrrr

ddbs

ccas

,1,1''

,1'

1121

,1,1''

,1'

1211

,;...;,),...,;(;,...,;1

,;...;,,,...,;(;,...,;1

1

1

provided that 02Re,0Re 1 s and

02Re 211 s

( i is given by (2.3))

Page 116: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

112

Several other new results can be obtained by specializing the parameters involvedin the result (3.1).

REFERENCES[1] B.D. Agrawal and J.P. Chaubey, Certain derivation of generating relations for generalized

polynomials, Indian J. Appl. Math., 10 (1980), 1155-1157 ibid, 11(1981), 357-359.[2] R.S. Chandel and U.C. Jain Certain integral formulas for the multivariable H-functions I, Indian

j. Pure Math., 13 (1982), 1420-1426.[3] J. Edwards, A Treatise on the Integral Calculus, Vol II, Chelsea Publ. Co., New York, (1922).[4] A. Erdélyi et al. Tables of Integral Transforms, Vol. II, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1954.[5] I. Fujiwara, A unified presentation of classical orthogonal polynomials, Math. Japon, 11 (1966),

133-148.[6] S.P. Goyal and T.O. Salim, Multidimensional Fractional integral operators involving a generalized

polynomial set, Kyungpook Math J., 38 (1998), 301-315.[7] I.S. Gradshteyn and I.M. Ryzhik, Tables of Integrals, Series and Products, Academic Press, New

York, 1965.[8] V.G. Gupta, Some integral formulas involving the product of the multivariable H-function and a

general class of polynomials, Indian J. Math., 31. (1989), 121-129.[9] S.L. Kalla, S.P. Goyal and R.K. Agrawal, On multiple integral transformations, Math. Notae, 28

(1976-77), 15-27.[10] E. D. Rainville, Special Functions, Chelsea Publ. Co., Bronx, New York (1971).[11] S.K. Raizada, A Study of Unified Representation of Special Functions of Mathematical Physics and

Their Use in Statistical and Boundary Value Problems, Ph.D. Thesis, Bundelkhand Univ., Jhansi,India (1991).

[12] M. Saigo, S.P. Goyal and S. Saxena, A theorem relating a generalized Weyl fractional integral,Laplace and Verma transforms with applications, J. Fractional Calculus, 13 (1998), 43-56.

[13] T.O. Salim, A series formula of generalized class of polynomials associated with Laplace transformand fractional integral operators, J. Rajasthan Acad. Phy. Sci., 1(3) (2002), 167-176.

[14] H. M. Srivastava and R. Panda, A note on certain results involving a general class of poplynomials,Boll. Un. Mat. Ital., A(5), 16(1979), 467-474.

[15] H.M. Srivastava, and R. Panda, Some bilateral generating functions for a class of generalizedhypergeometric polynomials, J. Reine Angew .Math 283/284 (1776), 265-274.

Page 117: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

113

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

MAXIMIZING SURVIVABILITY OF ACYCLIC MULTI-STATETRANSMISSION NETWORKS (AMTNs)

ByRaju Singh Gaur and Sanjay Chaudhary

Department of Mathematics, Institute of Basic Sciences, Khandari, Agara,Dr. B.R. Ambedkar University, Agra- 282002, Uttar Pradesh, India

e-mail : [email protected]

(Received : October 5, 2007)

ABSTRACTIn this paper, we evaluate the system survivability of acyclic multi-state

transmission networks (AMTNs) with vulnerable nodes(positions) using theuniversal generating function (UGF) technique. The AMTN survivability is definedas the probability that a signal from root node is transmitted each leaf node. TheAMTNs consist of a number of positions in which multi-state element (MEs) capableof receiving and /or sending a signal are allocated. The MEs located at each non-leaf positions. The two MEs located at first position. The number of MEs is notequal to the number of non-leaf positions. The AMTNs survivability is defined asthe comparison of two networks. All the MEs in the network are assumed to besatistically independent. The signal source is located at each network. The numberof leaf positions that can only receive a signal and a number of intermediatepositions containing MEs copable of transmitting the received signal to some othernodes. The signal transmisson is possible only along links between the nodes. Thenetworks are arranged in such a way that no signal leaving a node can return tothis node through any sequence of nodes otherwise we can say that cycle exists.2000 Mathematics Subject Classification : Primary 62N05; Secondary 90B25.Keywords : Acyclic multi-state transmisson networks, Multi-state, Survivability,Vulnerability, Universal generating function.

1. Introduction. Acyclic multi-state transmission network (AMTN) is ageneralization of tree structured. The example of AMTN is a radio relay station,where the signal source is allocated at root position (node) and receivers allocatedat leaf node. The retransmitter-generating signal situted at each station of radiorelay stations, which can transmit the signal to next stations. The AMTNs consistof a number of positions in which multi-state elements (MEs) capable of receivingand /or sending a signal are allocated. Each network has not position where thesignal source is allocated. The number of leaf nodes that can only receive a signaland the number of non-leaf nodes have retransmitter-generating signal. The event

Page 118: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

114

that a ME is in specific state is a random event. The probability of this event isassumed to be known for each ME and for every of its possible state.

This paper presents the comparison of survivability analysis of twonetworks. The MEs located at each non-leaf position, the two MEs located at firstposition. The number of MEs is not equal to the number of non-leaf positions. Thefirst network which has two MEs located at first position and other non leafpositions of this network has only - one multi-state element and in second network,the MEs located at each non-leaf position. If signal transmission is not workingcondition from root position to each leaf node then the networks fail otherwisewhole network is working condition. Malinowski and Preuss [9] discovered thatthe acyclic multi-state transmission network is a gerneralization of the tree-structured multi state systems and Hwang and Yao [4] described the concept ofmulti-state linear consecutively connected network and studied by Kossow andPreuss [5] and Zuo and liang [10]. Gaur and Chaudhary [1,2,3] earlier studied forreliability evaluation of acyclic multi-state network. The algorithm used in thisresearch work is referred by [6,7,8]. In this paper, we consider the case when theMEs allocated at the same mode are subject to a common cause failure. When asystem operates in battle conditions or is affected by acorrosive medium or otherhostile environment. The ability of a system to tolerate both the impact of externalfactors (attack) and internal causes (accidental failures or errors) should beconsidered. The measure of this ability is referred to as system survivability. Thetwo MEs located at the same node in ATMN can be destroyed by a single enternalimpact. An external factor usually causes failures of group of system elementssharing some common resource (allocated) with in the same protective casing,having the same power source gathered geographically, etc.). Therefore addingmore redundant parallel elements will improve system availability but will not beeffective from a vulnerability standpoint without sufficient separation betweenelements.

The paper is organized as follows : Section 2 introduces the model that isthe acyclic multi-state transmission networks model. Section 3 is devoted toSurvivability of AMTNs using universal generating function technique. Section 4presents the Disussion and Conclusion.

2. The Model. In the model considered here, the MEs located at each non-

leaf node Ci MNi 1 where Ci is the non-leaf position can have Ki different

states and each state k has probability ikip . The signal can transmit from non-

leaf node Ci to the nodes belonging to the set i . The ME cannot transmit a signal

to any node : ik : then the condition is total failure and in the case of

Page 119: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

115

operational state iikp . There are D available MEs with different characteristics

with probability d

ikip

: A signal can be transmitted by the ME located at Ci only if

it reaches this node, such that

D

k

ai ik

p1

1 where ME d Dd 1 located at Ci can

have Ki different states. The states of all the MEs are independent. The existenceof arc (Ci,Cj) E means that a signal can be transmitted directly from the node i to

node iji CCj :. if ECC ji , where j>i. The number of leaf nodes M: =

{CN-M+1,...,CN} and N is the total number of nodes in AMTN {note that suchnumbering is always possible in acyclic directed graph}.

The MEs located at Ci if some ME n can provide connection from Ci to a set

of nodes ik and ME m can not provide this connection, the state corresponding to

set ik can be defined for both MEs, while 0ni ik

p and 0mi ik

p .

The system survivability S is defined as a probability that a signal generatedat the root node C1 reaches all the M leaf nodes CN–M+1,...,CN.

In general, the resulting polynomial contains 2M-1 terms. The suggestedmethod can depend on the moderate values of M for solving AMTNs. We determine

here UGF technique, obtain zUi~ for each node Ci using operator

zUi~

iik

iik

K

k

Vik

K

k

Vik zzqzq

~

1

0~

~

1

~ ~~. zUi

ˆ (u-functions) is obtained, the values

ivv ikik ˆ,...,1ˆ representing the presence of signal at nodes iCC ,...,1 are not used

further for determining zUmˆ for any m>i. If the signal can not reach any position

from Ci+1 to CN independently of states of MEs located in these positions then in

state k, .0...1 Nviv ikik The only thing one has to know is the sum of

probabilities of states in which these paths exit; it means that we replace all the

values ivv ikik ˆ,...,1ˆ in vector ikv̂ for zUiˆ with zeros and collecting the like terms.

For solving the zUiˆ , the vector ikv̂ , which contain only zero, is removed and

collect the like terms in the resulting polynomial. For calculating the AMTNs

survivability S, first calculate zUzUzU iii 11~

,ˆˆ and at last determine

Page 120: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

116

the coefficient of the term of zU NN ˆ in which 1ˆ jv MN for all

.1 NjMN

3. Survivability of AMTNs Using Universal Generating FunctionTechnique. Let us consider AMTN with N=5, M=2, presented in Fig. 1. u-functionof two MEs located at first position C1 and other MEs located at position C2,C3individually and in Fig. 2 individual MEs located at position C1,C2,C3.Case-I. Consider, for example the simplest case in which four identical MEs shouldbe allocated, here the number of MEs is not equal to the number of non-leaf node.When allocated at node C1, the MEs can have four states :* Total failure: ME does not connect node C1 with any other node (Probability

of this state is 121

11 ppp )

* ME connects C1 with C2 (Probability of this state is 212

211

21 ppp )

* ME connects C1 with C3 (Probability of this state is 312

311

31 ppP )

* ME connects C1 with both C2 and C3 (Probability of this state is 1

3,21P

3,212

3,21 pp ).

When allocated at node C2, the MEs can have two states,* Total failure : ME does not connect node C2 with any other node (Probability

of this state is p2).

* ME connects C2 with C3 (Probability of this state is 32p ) and C2 with C5 is

p2{5}, and C2 with C3 and C5 is p2{3,5}).When allocated at node C3, the MEs can have two states,

* Total failure : ME does not connect node C3 with any other node (Probability

of this state is 3p )

* ME connects C3 with C4 is p3{4}.The probability that each node survives during the system operation time

is .

Let us suppose that 21 pp there two possible allocations of the MEs

with in (Fig. 1):(A) Two MEs are located in the first position(B) and other MEs located at second and third position.When both MEs are allocated at position C1 then we have,

Page 121: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

117

,0110013,21

00100131

01000121

000001111 zpzpzpzpzu

,0110023,21

00100231

01000221

000002112 zpzpzpzpzu

,001015,32

0000152

0010032

0000022 zpzpzpzpzu

.0001043

0000033 zpzpzu

Following AMTN procedure we obtain,

01000221

0110013,21

00100131

01000121

00000111211 ,, zpzpzpzpzpzuzu

0110023,21

00100231 zpzp

21

131

131

231

11

01000221

121

21

121

221

11

0000021

11 pppppzppppppzpp

2

3,211

312

211

312

3,2,11

212

311

212

3,2111

00100231

131 ppppppppppzpp

011002

3,211

3,212

211

3,2121

13,21 zpppppp

21

131

231

11

01000221

121

21

121

221

11

0000021

11 ppppzppppppzpp

23,21

121

231

121

13,21

131

121

23,21

001000231

131 1 ppppppppzpp

1

3,212

211

3,212

3,212

312

211

3,212

3,211

312

211

31 1 ppppppppppp

,0110023,21

13,21

231 zppp

21

131

231

11

01000221

121

21

121

221

11

0000021

11 ppppzppppppzpp

0110023,21

13,21

13,21

221

131

231

121

23,21

00100231

131 zppppppppzpp ,

01000221

121

21

121

121

221

11

0000021

1112111 ,

~zpppppppzppzuzuzU

2

311

212

3,21001002

311

3111

131

231

11 pppzpppppp

,0110023,21

13,21

13,21

221

131 zppppp

00101

5,3200001

5200100

3200000

222~

zpzpzpzpzuzU ,

.~ 00010

4300000

333 zpzpzuzU

Page 122: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

118

Now, ,~ˆ11 zUzU

00100231

131

11

131

231

11

01000221

121

21

121

221

111

ˆ zppppppzppppppzU

.0110023,21

13,21

13,21

221

131

231

121

23,21 zpppppppp

zUzUzU 212ˆ,ˆˆ

00100231

131

11

131

231

11

01000221

121

21

121

221

11 zppppppzpppppp

00000

2011002

3,211

3,211

3,212

211

312

311

212

3,21 , zpzpppppppp

001015,32

0000152

0010032 zpzpzp

11

131

231

11

010002

221

221

121

21

121

221

11 ppppzpppppppp

23,21

0010032

231

131

11

131

231

11

22

231

131 pzpppppppppp

221

131

231

121

23,21

22

23,21

13,21

13,21

221

131

231

121 ppppppppppppp

01100

322

211

2121

121

221

11

232

23,21

13,21

13,21 zppppppppppp

221

131

231

121

23,21

20100152

221

121

21

121

221

11

2 pppppzppppppp

23,21

25,32

221

121

21

121

221

11

252

23,21

13,21

13,21 pppppppppppp

.011015,32

23,21

13,21

13,21

221

131

231

121 zpppppppp

11

131

231

11

010002

221

121

21

121

221

11 ppppzppppppp

00100

3222

311

3111

131

231

11

2231

131 zpppppppppp

231

121

23,21

223,21

13,21

13,21

221

131

231

121

23,21 ppppppppppp

322

211

2121

121

221

11

2322

23,21

13,21

221

131 ppppppppppppp

231

121

23,21

20100152

221

121

21

121

221

11

201100 pppzpppppppz

01101

5,322

211

2121

121

221

11

2

5,32522

3,211

3,211

3,2121

131 2

zppppppp

ppppppp

.

Page 123: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

119

13,21

221

131

231

121

23,21

231

131

11

131

231

112

ˆ ppppppppppppzU

221

131

231

121

23,21

231

131

11

131

231

11

223,21

13,21 ppppppppppppp

0010032

221

121

21

121

221

11322

23,21

13,21

13,21 zpppppppppppp

.001015,32

221

121

21

121

221

11

2

5,32522

3,211

3,211

3,212

211

31

231

121

23,21

20000152

221

121

21

121

221

11

2

zppppppp

ppppppp

pppazppppppp

zUzUzU 323~

13,21

221

131

231

121

23,21

231

131

11

131

231

11 pppppppppppp

221

131

231

121

23,21

231

131

11

131

231

11

223,21

13,21 ppppppppppppp

3322

211

2121

121

221

11322

23,21

13,21

13,21 ppppppppppppp

3200001

522

211

2121

121

221

113

200100 pzppppppppz

32

5,32522

3,211

3,211

3,212

211

312

311

212

3,21 ppppppppppp

221

131

231

121

23,2143

3001015,32

221

121

21

121

221

11 ppppppazppppppp

5,322

211

2121

121

221

1143

35,3252

23,21

13,21

13,21 ppppppppppppp

221

131

231

121

23,21

231

131

11

131

231

1143

200111 ppppppppppppz

23,21

231

131

11

131

231

1143

323,21

13,21

13,21 ppppppppppp

21

121

221

11322

23,21

13,21

13,21

221

131

231

121 ppppppppppppp

.0010032

221

121 zppp

1

3,212

211

312

311

212

3,212

311

3111

131

231

11 pppppppppppp

221

131

231

121

23,21

231

131

11

131

231

11

223,21

13,21 ppppppppppppp

322

211

2121

121

221

11322

23,21

13,21

13,21 pppppppppppp

Page 124: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

120

2

211

312

311

212

3,212

211

2121

121

221

11

2001003 pppppppppppzp

231

121

23,21

3000015,32523

23,21

13,21

13,21 pppzpppppp

21

121

221

11

3435,3252

23,21

13,21

13,21

221

131 pppppppppppp

23,21

231

131

11

131

231

11

200011435,32

221

121 pppppppzpppp

433222

3,211

3,211

3,212

211

312

311

21 pppppppppp

.000104332

221

121

21

121

221

11

3 zppppppppa

1

3,212

211

312

311

212

3,212

3,211

2121

121

221

11

23

ˆ ppppppppppppzU

2

211

312

311

212

3,21300001

5,325232

3,211

3,21 pppppzppppp

221

121

21

121

221

11

3435,3252

23,21

13,21

13,21 pppppppppppp

231

121

23,21

231

131

11

131

231

11

200011435,32 pppppppppzpp

2

2111

343322

23,21

13,21

13,21

221

131 ppppkpppppp

.000104332

221

121

21

121 zpppppp

5,325232

3,2131213,212

212112

3 222ˆ ppppppppppzU

2113

435,32522

3,2131213,21300001 222 pppppppppz

23,2131213,21

231311

200011435,32

221 222 pppppppzppp

.2 000104332

221211

343322 zpppppppp

The system survivability is equal to the coefficient corresponding to the singleterm of the polynomial:

221211

3435,3252

23,2131213,21

31 222 ppppppppppS

435,32 pp

3,2131213

435,32522

3,2131213,213 1222 pppppppppp

Page 125: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

121

435,322

2121 pppp

5,3252432

3,213

5,32215,3252433,2132 pppppppppp

3,2121435,32213

5,32523143213 22 pppppppppp

5,3252432

3,215,32215,3252433,213 2 pppppppppp

.22 3,2121435,32215,3252314321 pppppppppp

Case-II. Let us consider AMTN with N=5 and M=2 presented in Fig. 2 individualMEs located at node C1, C2 and C3 are, here the number of MEs is equal to thenumber of non-leaf positions.

,~ 01100

3,2100100

3101000

2100000

111 zpzpzpzpzuzU

,~ 00101

5,3200001

5200100

3200000

222 zpzpzpzpzuzU

.~ 00010

4300000

333 zpzpzuzU

Following the consecutive procedure, we obtain :

,ˆ~11 zUzU

Page 126: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

122

,ˆ 011003,21

0010031

01000211 zpzpzpzU

zUzUzU 212~

,ˆˆ

00100

3200000

201100

3,2100100

3101000

21 , zpzpzpzpzp

001015,32

0000152 zapzp

23,2100100

32312

23101000

221 ppzppppzpp

5231201001

5221201100

32212

323,212 ppzppzpppp

.011015,323,21

25,3221

2523,21

2001015,3231

2 zppppppzpp

3,212

3,2100100

322312

3101000

221 ppzppppzpp

5,32523,21201001

5221201101

32212

322 pppzppzpppp

.011015,3221

2 zpp

3,21322312

3101000

221 pppppzpp

5,32523,21200001

5221200100

32212

3223,212 pppzppzppppp

.001015,3221

2 zpp

32212

3223,212

3,21322312

312ˆ ppppppppppzU

.001015,3221

25,32523,21

2000015221

200100 zpppppzppz

zUzUzU 323~

,ˆˆ ,

32212

3223,212

3,21322312

31 pppppppppp

,001015,3221

25,32523,21

2000015221

200100 zpppppzppz

0001043

000003 zpzp

32212

3223,212

3,21322312

31 pppppppppp

00101

35,32212

5,32523,21200100

3 zppppppzp

Page 127: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

123

322313

31200011

435,32213

5,32523,213 ppppzpppppp

.00110433221

33223,21

2 zpppppp

3,21300001

35,32212

5,32523,212

3ˆ pzppppppzU

322313

31200011

435,32213

5,3252 ppppzppppp

.00010433221

33223,21

33,21

2 zppppppp

The system survivability is equal to the coefficient corresponding to the singleterm of the polynomial

435,32213

5,32523,213 ppppppSn (2)

Since 15,3232522 pppp

435,32213

3223,213 1 pppppp . (3)

By comparing eqns. (1) and (2), one can decide which allocation of the elements is

preferable for any given 3121433,21 ,,,, pppp and 5,3252 pp . Condition nSS 1

can be rewritten as,

43213

5,3252432

3,213

5,32215,3252433,213 22 pppppppppppp

5,32523,213

3,2121435,32213

5,325231 2 ppppppppppp

435,32213 ppp (4)

Equation (4) present nSS 1 as function of variables 433,21 pp and 5,3252 pp .

Solution I provides lower system survivability than solution II, when the valuesof located below the curve and the solution II provides lower system survivabilitythan solution I, when the values of located above the curve.

4. Conclusion. This paper is based on universal generating functiontechnique for solving the survivability of AMTNs. The resulting polynomial

contains 12 M term. Therefore, the suggested method can be applied for AMTNs

with moderate values of M where M is the number of leaf nodes. The algorithmwhich is used in this paper for solving AMTNs survivability of MEs in which thenodes vulnerability is taken into account. The networks are arranged in such away that signal transmission from root node to leaf node. The paper suggests asystem survivability method for comparison of two networks.

Page 128: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

124

REFERENCES[1] R.S. Gaur and S. Chaudhary, Availability and maximizing survivability of Cable T.V. transmission

system, ,~ bhaananJ 34 (2004), 107-112.

[2] R.S. Gaur and S. Chaudhary, Reliability enhancement and fixed transmission times of acyclictransmission multi-state networks (AMTNs). Proceedings of the Ramunujan Mathematical Society.Agra (2004).

[3] R.S. Gaur and S. Chaudhary, Reliability enhancement and fixed transmission times of acyclictransmission multi-state networks (ATMNs), JMASS, 2 (2006), 46-56.

[4] F. Hwang and Y. Yao, Multi-state consecutively-connected systems, IEEE Transaction onReliability,38(1989), 472-474.

[5] A Kossow and W. Preuss, Reliability of linear consecutively-connected systems with multi-statecomponents, IEEE Transaction on Reliability, 44 (1995), 518-522.

[6] G. Levitin, Optimal allocation of multi-state retransmitters in acyclic transmission networks,Reliability Engineering and System Safety, 75 (2002), 73-82.

[7] G. Levitin, Reliability evaluation for acyclic consecutively-connected networks with multi-stateelements, Reliability Engineering and System Safety, 73 (2001), 137-143.

[8] A. Lisnianski and G. Levitin, Multi-State System Reliability: Assessment, Optimization andApplications, Vol. 6: Series on Quality,Reliability & Engineering, Word Scientific, New Jersey,(2003).

[9] J. Malinowski and W. Preuss, Reliability evaluation for tree-structured systems with multi-statecomponents, Microelectron Reliab, 36 (1996), 9-17.

[10] M. Zuo and M. Liang, Reliability of multi-state consecutively-connected systems, Reliability

Engineering and system Safety, 44 (1994), 173-176.

Page 129: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

125

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

THE INTEGRATION OF CERTAIN PRODUCTS INVOLVING H-FUNCTION WITH GENERAL POLYNOMIALS AND INTEGRAL

FUNCTION OF TWO COMPLEX VARIABLESBy

V.G. GuptaDepartment of Mathematics

University of Rajasthan, Jaipur-302004,Rajasthanand

Nawal Kishor JangidDepartment of Mathematics

Global Institute of Technology, Jaipur-302022, Rajasthan(Received : August 14, 2008)

ABSTRACTIn this paper, we wstablish a new integral involving general polynomials of

Srivastava (1985), Laguere polynomials and integral function of two complexvariables of order , given in Dzrbasjan (1957), based on the properties of Fox's H-

function. This Integral is unified in nature and acts as a key formula from whichwe can derive as its specials cases, integrals pertaining to a large number of simplerspecial functions and polynomials. For example, we derive a few special cases ofour integral and main theorem which are also new and of interest by themselves.The results established here are basis in nature and are likely to be of usefulapplications in several field's notably mathematical physics, statistical mechanicsand probability theory.2000 Mathematics Subject Classification : Primary 33C70; Secondary 33C60Keywords : General polynomials, Laguerre polynomial and Fox's H-function.

1. Introduction. Srivastava ([11], P. 185, eq.(7)) has defined and introducedthe general polynomials

R

rr

R

RRr

r

kR

kRR

VU

k R

kVRkVVU

kR

VVUU xxkUkUA

k

U

k

UxxS ...,;...;,

!...

!...,..., 11111

1

1

1 111

/

0 1

1/

01

,...,,...,

(1.1)

where rvv ,...,1 are arbitrary positive integers and the coefficients rr kUkUA ,;...;, 11

are arbitrary constants real or complex.The Fox's H-function is defined in terms of a Mellin-Barnes type integral as

L

s

qq

ppnmqp dszs

bbaa

zH2

1,,...,,,,...,,

11

11,, ...(1.2)

Page 130: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

126

Where

p

njjj

q

mjjj

n

jjj

m

jjj

sasb

sasb

s

11

11

1

1

...(1.3)

and .0,1 z An empty product is interpreted as unity. Also m,n,p and q are

integers satisfying ,1 qm ,0 pn qjpj j ,...,1,,...,1 are positive

numbers and qjbpja jj ,...,1,,...,1 are complex numbers. L is the suitable

contour of Barnes type such that the poles of mjsb jj ,...,1 lie to the right

and those of njsa jj ,...,11 lie to the left of L. the Integral converges if

0,0111111

BAq

mjj

m

jj

p

njj

n

jj

q

jj

p

jj

and .2arg Bz These assumptions for the H-function will be adhered to

throughout the paper. ,

,,,

,

qq

ppnmqp b

azH where ppa , stands for

ppaa ,,...,, 11 and qqb , stands for .,,...,, 11 qqbb

The symbol nm, represents for the set of m parameters:

mmn

mn

mn 1

,...,1

,

.

Let

0,

2121

,21

21

2121

!!,

nn

nnnn zznn

azzF ...(1.4)

be an integral function of complex variables z1 and z2. Denote

21,max21

zzFrMrzz

F

the maximum modulus of 21 , zzF .

Dzrabasjan ([4]. P. 257) has given the following definition of order:

The integral function 21, zzF is said to be of order if

0

log

loglog.lim

r

rMSup F

r...(1.5)

2. First Integral. In this section, we evaluate the following integral whichwill be required in our Investigation :

Page 131: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

127

dxba

zxHxyxySxLexqq

ppnmqpR

VVUUk

xy R

R

,

,,...,

0,

,1,...,,...,

1

1

R

kk yyL

k,..,

!21 1

2/11

21

1,,,,,1,,1,,2,

,2, kba

zHqq

ppnmqp ...(2.1)

where is a positive integer, 2arg,0,0 BzBA and

R

jjjj kmjb

1

,,...,11/1Re and

. ,;...;,!

...,..., 11

/

0 1

/

01

11

1

RR

VU

k

R

j j

kjkVjVU

kR kUkUA

k

yUyyL

rr

R

j

jj

Proof. To prove (2.1) we first express the general polynomials by (1.1), the H-function by (1.2), then change the order of integration and summation which isjustifiable due to the convergence conditions mentioned with the integral andevaluate the inner integral with the help of ([7], p 76), now using the formula

nn n

11

1

and the Gauss integral multiplication formula ([5], p.4) we arrive at the righthand side of (2.1) after a little simplification.

3. Main Theorem. Let :2,12

arg,0

lll and let

0,

2121

,21

21

2121

!!,

nn

nnnn zznn

azzF be an integral function of two complex variables z1

and z2 of order 0 then for arg 1 =arg 2 , we have

qq

ppnmqp

ttnn b

attzHettP

,,

, 22110 0

,,

1221121,

2211

21

221122111,...,,...,2211 ,...,1

1ttyttySttL R

VVUUk

R

R

2121 , dtdtttF

Page 132: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

128

0,

112

11

21

21

2/112/1

2121

21 ,...,

1

!1!2

1nn

Rnnnn

kk yyL

nn

nn

a

k

1,11

,,,

,1,11

,1,11

,

21

2121

2,,2,

knn

bb

annnn

zH

qq

ppnm

qp

...(3.1)Provided (i) is a +ive integer

(ii) 2arg,0,0 BzBA

(iii) mjbnn

jj ,...,1,11

Re 21

(iv) The series in (3.1) is uniformly and absolutely convergent in a suitably choosendomain.

Proof of Theorem. Let us first take 0Re a and consider the integral

0

0 211

21,21

21xxaLexxaI k

xxann

21211,...,,..., ,...,1

1xxayxxayS R

VVUU

R

R

212121

,,

21

,,

dxdxxxba

xxzaH nn

qq

ppnmqp

where , n1 and n2 are positive integers. Changing the variables

tutuxutx 0,10,,1 21

we have

atyatySatLetaI RVVUUk

atnnnn

R

R,...,1

,...,,...,0 0,

1

1

21

21

dtduutxx

uuba

atzH nn

qq

ppnmqp ,

,1

,,

21,,

21

atyatySatLet RVVUUk

atnn R

R,..., 1

,...,,...,

0

1

0 1

1

21

Page 133: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

129

dtduuuba

atzH nn

qq

ppnmqp

211,,,

,

.

Evaluating u-integral with the help of the Eulerian integral of the first kind(Copson, 1961, P. 212), we obtain

atyatySatLetnnnn

aI RVVUUk

atnnnn

R

R,...,

!1!!

1,...,,...,

021

21,

1

1

21

21

dtba

atzHqq

ppnmqp

,,,

,

xLexa

nnnn

kx

nnnn

0

111

21

212121

!1

!!

dxba

zxHxyxySqq

ppnmqpR

VVUU

R

R

,,

,..., ,,1

,...,,...,

1

1 . ...(3.2)

Now evaluating x-integral with the help of (2.1) we have

1

211

21

211

121

,21

21

21 !1!!!

,...,21

nn

knn

R

k

nn

annknn

yyLaI

1,11

,,,

,,1, 11

,1;11

,

21

2121

2,,2,

knn

bb

annnn

zH

qq

ppnm

qp

...(3.3)

where 2arg,0,0 BzBA .

mjbnn

jj ,...,1,11

Re 21

and

RR

VU

k

R

j

kj

j

kVjVU

kR kUkUAy

k

UyyL

rr

R

jjj ,;...;,!

...,..., 11

/

0 1

/

01

11

1

Let arg 21 arg and if we denote iea where

,2arg,0cosRe Bza then from (3.1), we obtain

Page 134: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

130

0

0 22111

221121,2211

21, ttLettaP k

ttann

221122111,...,,..., ,...,1

1ttayttayS R

VVUU

R

R

21

0,11

21

,2211

,,

21

2121

!!,,

dtdtttnn

aba

ttzaHnn

nnnn

qq

ppnmqp

0

0

12211

0, 21

,1

21

21

!!tt

nn

ae

nn

nni

22112211 ttaLe k

tta

221122111,...,,..., ,...,1

1ttayttayS R

VVUU

R

R

21212211

,,

21

,,

dtdtttba

ttzaH nn

qq

ppnmqp

1

21

10, 21

,1

21

21

21

.

1!!

nn

nn

nni

nn

ae

21

0

0 1

2121 xxaLexx k

xxa

21211,...,,..., ,...,1

1xxayxxayS R

VVUU

R

R

211121

,,

21

,,

dxdxxxba

xxzaH nn

qq

ppnmqp

1

211

0, 21

121

21

21

21

21

!1!21

nn

knn

nn

nnik

ann

ae

k

Rnn yyL ,...,1

112

11

21

1, 11

,,,

,,1, 11

,,1,11

,

21

2121

2,,2,

knn

b

annnn

zH

qq

ppnm

qp

due to relation (3.2) where

RR

VU

k

R

j

kj

kj

VU

kR kUkUAyUyyL

rr

R

j

j

jkjV ,;...;,...,..., 11

/

0 1 !

/

01

11

1

.

Page 135: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

131

Thus under conditions ,2,12

arg,argarg,0 121

ll and an appeal to

analytic continuation we have (3.1).The change of order of integration and summations in (3.3) is justified by

the de 1 vallee Poussiu's theorem (Bromwich, 1931, p. 504) under the conditionimposed in the theorem.

4. Special Cases. (i) If take R=1 in (2.1) we get integral involving theproduct of general class of polynomials and Fox's H-function.

dxba

zxHxySxLexqq

ppnmqp

VUk

x

,

,,,

0 11

1

11

1

11

/

0111

1

2/1121

,!

21VU

k

kj

kkk kUAyk

UjkjV

1,,,,,,1,,,1,,

1

112,,2, kkb

akkzH

qq

ppnmqp ...(4.1)

where is a positive integers, 2arg,0,0 BzBA and

1,1/1Re 1 jBbk jj .

(ii) If we take R=1 in (3.1) our result reduces to

022111

02211

1221121,

1

1

2211

21, ttySttLettP V

Uktta

nn

21212211

,, ,

,,

dtdtttFba

ttzHqq

ppnmqp

0,

12

11

21

21

2/1121

2121

21 1!1

21nn

nnnnkk nn

nn

a

11

1

111

/

0111

1

1,

!

VU

k

k kUAyk

UkV

1,11

,,,

,,1,11

,,1,11

,

211

211

211

2,,2,

knn

kb

ann

knn

kzH

qq

ppnm

qp

...(4.2)

Page 136: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

132

provided that (i) is a positive integer

(ii) 2arg,0,0 BzBA

(iii) 11

Re 211

jjbnn

k

(iv) The series in (4.2) is uniformly and absolutely convergent in a suitablychoosen domain.

(iii) Letting 1,0 0,01 AU in the equation (4.1) and (4.2) we get the result obtained

by Shah ([9], p715) and Nigam ([7], p.2, eqn (3.1)) respectively as given below.

dxba

HxLexqq

ppnmqpk

x

,,

0 ,

,

1,,, ,,, 1,,, 1,,

21 2,,2,

2/1121

kba

zHqq

ppnmqp

kk...(4.3)

where is a positive integer, 2arg,0,0 BzBA , and 1/1Re jjb

0

0 1

221121,2211

21, tt

nn ettP

21212211

,,2211 ,

,,

dtdtttFba

ttzHttLqq

ppnmqpk

12

11

1

0, 21

211

21

21

21

21

21

!1!21

nn

nn

nn

nnkk

nn

a

k

1,11

,,,

,,1,11

,,1,11

,

21

2121

2,,2,

knn

b

annnn

zH

qq

ppnm

qp

...(4.4)Provided

(i) is a positive integer.

(ii) 2arg,0,0 BzBA

(iii) mjbnn

jj ,...,1,1/1

Re 21

Page 137: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

133

(iv) The series in (4.4) is uniformly and absolutely convergent in asuitably chosen domain.(iv) If we make use of the relation. (Sharma; 1965, p. 199)

q

pnmqp

q

pnmqp bb

aazG

bbaa

zH,...,,...,

1,,...,1,1,,...,1,

1

1,,

1

1,,

0

0 22111

22112211 ttLett k

tt

221122111,...,,..., ,...,1

1ttyttyS R

VVUU

R

R

21211

12211

,, ,

,...,,...,

dtdtttFbbaa

ttzGq

nmqp

0,

12

11

21

21

2/112/1

2121

21

1

!1!2

1nn

nnnn

kk

nn

nn

a

k RyyL ,...,1

11

,,,

,...,,11

,,1

,

211

12121

2,,2,

knn

b

annnn

zG

q

pnm

qp (4.5)

where

11

1 0 0 1111 ,;...;,

!...,...,

VU

k

VU

k

R

jRR

kj

j

jR

RR

R

j kUkUAyk

UyyL and

R

jjk

1 (4.6)

(v) If we take R=1 in (4.5) we get the integral involving the product of generalclass of polynomials and G-function

0

0 22111

22112211 ttLett k

tt

21211

12211

,,22111 ,

,...,

,...,1

1dtdtttF

bb

aattzGttyS

q

pnmqp

VU

111

/

0 1

11

21

1

1

0, 21

2/1121

,!!1

21 111

1

11

21

21

21

211 kUAyk

U

nn

a kVU

k

kVnn

nn

nn

nnkkk

Page 138: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

134

1

1,,,,

,...,,11

,,11

,

211

121

121

12,

,2,k

nnkb

ann

knn

kzG

qq

pnm

qp

...(4.7)

(vi) Letting 1,0 0,0 AU in equation (4.7) we get the result obtained by Nigam

([7], P. 5, eq.(4.1))

0

0 22111

22112211 ttLett k

tt

21211

12211

,, ,

,...,,...,

dtdtttFbbaa

ttzGq

nmqp

12

11

1

0, 21

2/1k121

k

21

21

21

21

!1!21

nn

nn

nn

nn

nn

a

k

γδ δπ

1

1,,,

,...,,11

,,11

,

21

12121

2,,2,

knn

b

annnn

zG

qq

pnm

qp .

REFERENCES[1] T.J.I.A. Bromwich, An Introduction to the Theory of Infinite Series, London (1931).[2] B.L.J., Baraaksma, Asymptotic expansions and analytic continuations for a class of

Barness-integrals, Compositio Math. 15 (1963), 339-341.[3] E.T. Copson, Theory of Functions of Complex Variables, Oxford, (1961).[4] M.M. Dzrbasjan, Mathematich Cskii Sbornik, 41 (1957) (83), 257 (Russian).[5] A. Erdélyi et.al., Higher Transcendental Functions. Mc-Graw Hill Book Company, Inc.

New york, (1953).[6] C. Fox, The G and H-function as symmetrical Fourier Kernal. Trans. Amer, Math., Soc. 98

(1961), 395-429.[7] A.M. Mathai and R.K. Saxena, Generalized Hypergeometric Functions with Applications

in Statistics and Physical Sciences, Springer-verlag, New York, 1970.[8] H.N. Nigam, Integral involving Fox's H-function and integral function of two complex

variables, 64 (1972), 1-5.[9] M. Shah, Some results on the H-function involving generalized Laguerre polynomail.

Proc, Camb, Phil, Soc. 65 (1969), 713-720.[10] O.P. Sharma, Some finite and infinite integrals involving H-function and Gauss's

hypergeometric functions, Collectanca, Mathematica, 17 (1965), 197-209.[11] H.M. Srivastava, A multilinear generating function for the Konhauser sets of biorthogonal

polynomials suggested by the Laguerre polynomails, Pacific. J. Math. 117 (1985), 183-191.

Page 139: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

135

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

STUDY OF VELOCITY AND DISTRIBUTION OF MAGNETIC FIELD INLAMINAR STEADY FLOW BETWEEN PARALLEL PLATES

ByPratap Singh

Department of Mathematics and Statistics, Allahabad, Agricultural Institute-(Deemed University) Allahabad-211007, Uttar Pradesh, India

(Received : October 10, 2008)

ABSTRACTWe studied flow of velocity and distribution of magnetic field in laminar

steady flow between two parallel plates situded at a distance and having relativevelocity between them. For low Hartman number, flow velocity numericallyincreases rapidly in the middle of the plates, then it numerically increases slowlynear the plates. But for large Hartmann number it numerically increases slowlyin the middle of the plates and then it numerically increases rapidly near theplates. It decreases the strengh of the magnetic field decreases. For large Hartmannnumber, the strength of the magnetic field is inversely proportional to the-Hartmann number.2000 Mathematics Subject Classification: Primerey secondaryKeywords: Magnetic permeability/ coefficient of viscocity/electrical conductivity/Hartmann number.

1. Introduction. Contribution of laminar steady and unsteady flow hasbeen made by several authors because of its wide application in Engineering,Physical, Medical Science and Oil refining etc. Problem of heat transfer throughthe annular space when the fluid flow is laminar and there is uniform heatingeither from out side, from in side or from both was investigated [1]. Numeroustheoretical and experimental studies of both laminar and turbulent heat transferin annuli taking various types of wall temperature distributions have been made([2],[4]). An analysis on laminar flow and heat transfer in concentric annuli withmoving core was obtained [5]. The stability of laminar flow of dusty gas was studied[6]. Contribution on laminar flow an electrically conducted liquid in a homogeneousmagnetic field was made [7],[8]. Our problem is to study of velocity and distributionof magnetic field in laminar steady flow between parallel plates situated at adestance haveing relative velocity between them.

2. Formulation of the problem. Let us consider two-dimensional steadylaminar flow of an incompressible and electrically conducting fluid of constantviscosity and enstant electrically conductivity between two parallel insulated plates.The two plates are situated at a distance 2L and relative velocity 2U between

Page 140: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

136

them. The velocity of flow is parallel to the plates, which are in the direction of x-axis. An external magnetic field of constant strength H0 in the direction of y-axisis also in consideration. Then conditions of flow are:

. **,*,0,,*

,0,0,**

20

*0

yxpUPHHHyHHH

wvyUuu

zYxx ...(2.1)

where LLyyLxx *,*, and U are the characteristic length and velocity fot the

problem respectively. Using (1) and neglecting stars, the equation of motion

,0. u

,2

. 22

HpHH

DtuD e

e

HVuHHut

HH

2..

takes the form

xp

dydH

Rdy

udR

xH

e

2

21...(2.2)

yp

dydH

HR xxH

...(2.3)

and

01

2

2

dy

HdRdy

du x...(2.4)

where ,,, 2

20 ULR

vH

RUL

R ee

e H

Re= Reynolds number,RH= Magnetic pressure number,

R = Magnetic Reynolds number,

= density of the fluid,= coefficient of viscosity,

e = Magnetic permeability,

Page 141: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

137

v = Kinetic coefficient of viscosity,= electrical conductivity.From (2.2) and (2.3), we get

011

2

2

3

3

2 dy

HdRdy

udR

x

h...(2.5)

where hHeh RRRRR , is Hartmann number.

Subtracting (2.4) from (2.5) , we have

023

3

dydu

Rdy

udh ...(2.6)

Consider that the two plates are situated at 1y and there is no pressure

gradient in flow field.Now the boundary conditions are:y=1, u=1; y=0, u=0; y=–1, u=-1. ...(2.7)Using condition (2.7) then solution of (2.6) is

hh

hh

RR

yRyR

eeee

u

. ...(2.8)

Case I. when ,0hR we have

u=y,it is a straight line, whose gradient is 1.

Case II. When hR , we have

u=0 (expect at 1y ).

Plates are insulated. So the boundary conditions are:

1y , Hx =0.

Integrating (2.4) with respect to t and using above boundary conditions, we get

hh

hhhh

RR

yRyRRR

h

x

eeeeee

RRH 1

...(2.9)

It is the expression for magnetic field.3. Results and conclusion. From tabel 1, it is found that for low Hartmann

number, the velocity of flow numerically increases rapidly in the middle of theplates, and then it numerically increases slowly near the plates. But for largeHartmann number, it numerically increases slowly in the middle of the plates, andthen it numerically increases rapidly near the plates. As Hartmann number

Page 142: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

138

Page 143: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

139

Page 144: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

140

increases velocity decreases. From table 2, it is found that on increasing Hartmannnumber strength of the magnetic field decreases. For large Hartmann number, thestrength of magnetic fieldi inversely proportional to Hartmann number i.e.independent of the distance from the plates. Figure 1 and 2 show the pattern of theflow of the velocity and distribution of magnetic field respectively.

REFERENCES[1] M. Jakob and K. Rees, Heat transfer to a fluid in a laminar flow through an annular space, Trans.

AICHE, 37(1941), 619-648.[2] P.A. Mc Cuen, W. M. Kays and W. C. Reynolds, Heat transfer with laminar flow in concentric annuli

with constant and variable wall temperature and heat flux. Report No. AHT-2, Stanford UniversityC A , 1961.

[3] P. A. Mc Cuen, W. M. Kays and W. C. Renolds, Heat transfer with laminar flow and turbulent flowbetween parallel planes with constant and variable wall temperature and heat flux, Report No.AHT-3, Stanford University, CA. 1962.

[4] H. S. Heaton, W. C. Reynolds and W. M. Kays, Heat transfer with laminar flow in concentric annuliwith constant heat flux and simultaneously developing velocity and temperature distributions,Stanford University , C A. 1962.

[5] T. Shigenchi and Y. Lee, An analysis on fully developed laminar flow and heat transfer in concentricannuli with moving cores. Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer. 34(1991) 2593- 2601.

[6] P. G. Safiman , On the stability of laminar flow of dusty gas. J. Fluid Mech., 13 (1962), 120-128.[7] J. Hartman, Hydrodynamics I. Theory of the Laminar Flow of an electrically conductive Liquid in

a homogeneous Magnetic Field, Kgl. Danske Videnskabernes Selskab Math. Fys Med. Copenhagen.No.6 ,15 (1937).

[8] J. Hartmann, and F. Lazarus, Hydrodynamics II-Experimental Investigation on the flow of mercuryin a Homogeneous Magnetic Field, Kgl. Dandke Videnskabernes Selskab Math. Flys Med.l

Copenhagen No. 7 ,14, (1937).

Page 145: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

141

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

A NOTE ON THE ERROR BOUND OF A PERIODIC SIGNAL INHOLDER METRIC BY THE DEFERRED CESARO PROCESSOR

ByBhavana Soni

Jawaharlal Institute of Technology Borawan (Khargone)-451228,Madhya Pradesh, India

andPravin Kumar Mahajan

28, Tilak Path Khargone-451001 Madhya Pradesh, IndiaE-mail: pravin_mahajan [email protected]

(Received : November 20, 2007)

ABSTRACTWe determine the error bound of a periodic signal belonging to Hw -space

([6]) by deferred Cesaro-processor ([1]P. 414 and [4], p. 148) and generalize a resultof Zygmund ([7], p. 91).2000 Mathematics Subject Classification : 42A10,42A24.Keywords: Analog signal, Deferred Cesaro Processor, Modulus of continuity,Holder metric.

1. Definitions and Notations. Lets 2,0*Ct be a class of 2 - periodic

analog signals and let the Fourier trigonometric series be given by

ts ~

1 0

0 .sincos21

n nnnn tAntbntaa ...(1.1)

Singh [6] defined the space Hw by

,: 21212 ttKwtstsCtsHw ...(1.2)

and the norm ..w by

,,sup. 21,

.

21

ttsss w

ttcw

...(1.3)

where

, sup20

tsst

c

...(1.4)

and

21

21

21

2021

* ,*

sup, ttttw

tstststts

t

w

...(1.5)

Page 146: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

142

and choosing tttts * and ,0, 210 being increasing signals of t. if

cttAtt 2121 ...(1.6)

10,* 2121 ttKtt ...(1.7)

'A' and 'K' being positive constants, then the space

,10,: 21212

tttstsCtsH ...(1.8)

is a Banach spaces (see[5]) and the metric induced by the norm on H is

said to be a Hölder metric.

Let tsn be the thn parital sums of (1.1) and npLet and nq be sequences of

non-negative integers satisfying

nn qP ...(1.9)

and .lim nn

q ...(1.10)

The processor

n

n

q

pkk

nnnn ts

pqsD ,

1...(1.11)

defines the deferred Cesaro-transform nn qpD , ([1], see also [4],p.148). It is known

[1] that nn qpD , is regular under conditions (1.9) and (1.10). Note that -D(0,n) is

the (C,1) transform and let n be a monotone non- decreasing sequence of positive

integers such that 11 and ,11 nn then nnD n , is same as the thngeneralized De la vallee poussian processor [3] generated by the sequence {n}

We shall use following notations:

,222 1111tsttsttstt ..(1.12)

tpqtqpt

tK nnnnn 1sin1sin2sin2

12 . ...(1.13)

2. Main Theorem. Using Fejér operator, Zygmund ([7], p.91) has establishedthe following result.

Theorem A. Let t* be a non-negative and increasing signal defined in a right-

hand neighbourhood of t=0. Suppose that tt* for 10 . Let t be the

Page 147: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

143

modulus of continuity for a periodic signal s(t), then if

ottt as,*0 ...(2.1)

we have

,/1*;max 1120

nOtstsnt

...(2.2)

where 1; tsn is the Fejer operator.

The object of the present note is to generalize the above result shall establishfollowing:

Theorem. Let t* be a non-negative and increasing signal defined in the right-

hand neighbourhood of t=0. Suppose that .10for * tt Let t be the

modulus of continuity for a periodic signal s(t), then for 10, Hts and

. as,* ottot ...(2.3)

We have

.1

*1log.1

1

nnnn

nnn pqpq

qOtssD

3. Proof of theorem. Following Zygmund [7], we have

n

n

q

pkn

nnnn tsts

pqtssD 11

1

.1 2

0

dttKt

pq nnn

We write

11 tssDtE nnn

2/

0

1dttKt

pq nnn

and

2121, tEtEttE

2/

0 21

1dttKtt

pq nttnn

Page 148: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

144

sayIIpq nn

nn

pq

pq

nn,

121

2/

1

1

0

It is easy to prove

tKtt tt 421

...(3.1)

and .4 2121ttKtt tt ...(3.2)

Now using (3.1), we have

dttpqtqp

t

tpq

OI nnnnpq

nn

nn

1sin1sinsin

12

1

01

dttpqtqp

t

tOpq nnnn

pq

nn

nn

11*1 1

0 2

.1

*1

nnnn

nn

pqpqqp

O

Let 1 nn qp

then

11

1

1lim

n

n

n

n

nn

nn

n

qpqp

pqqp

thus .1

*1

nn pq

OI ...(3.3)

Again using (3.1) we have

dt

t

tpq

OInn pq

nn

2/

1 211

dtt

t

topq

Onn pq

nn

22/

1

*1

1

1

1*

1

nn

nn

nn

nnpq

pq

pq

pqO

Page 149: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

145

.1

*

nn pq

O ...(3.4)

Now from (3.2), we have

)(1

0 1 21

1 nn pqntt

nndttktt

pqOI

sayIIpq

O nn

n

n pq

q

q

nn,

11211

1

1

1

0

dttpqqpt

tt

pqoI nnnn

q

nn

n 21

0 221

11 11*1

nq

n dtttqO/1

0 21*

21* ttO ...(3.5)

and

dttpqqpt

tt

pqOI nnnn

pq

qnn

nn

n

1sin1sinsin

*1 /1

1 221

12

dttpqt

tt

pqO nn

pq

qnn

nn

n

1*

1 1

1 221

,log* 21

nn

n

pqq

ttO ...(3.6)

thus

.1log* 211

nn

n

pqq

ttOI ...(3.7)

Again from (3.3)

dt

t

tt

pqOI

nn pqnn

2

1 221

2*1

.* 21 ttO ...(3.8)

Now noting that

,2,1,1 rIII rrr ...(3.9)

we have from (3.3) and (3.7)

Page 150: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

146

,1

*1log*1

211

nnnn

n

pqpqq

ttOI ...(3.10)

and from (3.4) and (3.8)

.1

**1

212

nn pqttOI ...(3.11)

Thus from (3.10) and (3.11), we have

211

2121

, *sup,sup

.

21 tt

tEtEttE nn

ntt

.1

*1log1

nnnn

n

pqpqq

O ...(3.12)

It is to be noted that

ssDtE ntcn

201

1

max

nn pq

O1

* . ...(3.13)

Combining (3.12) and (3.13), we get

.1

*1log1

*1

nnnn

nnn pqpq

qOtssD

This completes the proof of theorem 1.REFERENCES

[1] R.P. Agnew, On deferred Cesàro means, Ann. Math .33(1932) 413-421.[2] G. Alexits, Convergence Problems of Orthogonal Series, Pergaman Press, 1961.

[3] P. Chandra, Functions of classes Lp and Lip p, generalized De La Valleepussin means, Math.

Student, 52(1984), 121-125.[4] G. Das , T. Ghose and B.K. Ray, Degree of approximation of functions by their Fourier series in

the generalized Hölder metric. Proc. Indian Acad. Sci (Math. Sci) 106,no (2) (1996), 139-153.[5] S. Prossdorff, Zur, Konvergenz der Fourier reihen Hölder stetiger funktionen, Math. Nachr,

69(1975), 7-14.[6] T. Singh, Degree of approximation of function in a normed spaces, Publ. Math. Debrecen, 40(3-4)

(1992), 261-267.[7] A. Zygmund, Trigonometric Series, Vol. 1, Cambridge University Press, 1959.

Page 151: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

APPLICATIONS OF SYMMETRY GROUPS IN HEAT EQUATIONBy

V. G. GuptaDepartment of Mathematics

University of Rajasthan Jaipur-302004, RajasthanKapil Pal and Rita Mathur

Department of MathematicsS. S. Jain Subodh Postgraduate College, Jaipur-302004, Rajasthan

E-mail [email protected](Received : December 10, 2008)

ABSTRACTThe main object of present paper is that to obtain the most general solution

for the parital differential equation of one dimensional heat conduction in a finiterod having the thermal diffusivity k0 using the general prolongation formula fortheir symmetry.2000 Mathematics Subject Classification : 17B66, 22Q75, 70G65)Keywords: Scaling, Translation, Linearity, Galilean-Boost.

1. Introduction.1.1 The General Prolongation formula.

Let

q

i

p

i

i

uux

xuxv

11

,, ...(1.1.1)

be a vector field defined on an open subset UXM where X is the space of

independent variables, U is the space of dependent variables, p is the number ofindependent variables and q is the number of dependent variables for the system.

Then thn -prolongation of v is the vector field

q

j J

nJn

uuxvvpr

1

, ...(1.1.2)

defined on the corresponding space nn UXM where X is the space of the

independent variables, nU is the space of the dependent varivables and the

derivatives of the dependent variables up-to n (order of differential equation). The

second summation being over all unordered multi-indices kjjJ ,...,1 with

.1,1 nkpjk The coefficient function J of npr v are given by the following

formula

Page 152: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

148

iuuDuxp

ii

ip

ii

iJ

nJ ,,11

...(1.1.3)

where ii xuu / and i

Ji xuiu /, (see Olver [2], eq. 2.38 and 2.39, p.-110).

1.2 Theorem. Suppose ,, nd ux for d=1,...,l is a system of differential equations

of maximal rank defined over UXM . If G is a local group of transformations

acting on M and

0, nd

n uxvpr ...(1.2.1)

for d=1,...,l, whenever 0, nux for every infinitesimal generator v of G, is a

symmetry group of the system, (see Olver[2], eqation 2.25, page 104).2. Mathematical Analysis.

2.1 The Heat conduction equation:The one-dimensional conduction of heat in finite rod, without source, with theassumptions(a)The position of the rod coincides with the x-axis,(b) the rod is homogeneous,(c) It is suffciently thin so that the heat is uniformly distributed over its crosssection at a given time t,(d) The surface of the rod is insulated to prevent any loss of heat through theboundary, is governed by parital differential equation in the standard form

xxt uku 0 ...(2.1.1)

where u(x,t) is the temperature at the point x at time t and k0 be the constantthermal diffusivity, which is the second order differential equation with twoindependent variables and one dependent variable (in our notation given in (1.1)p=2, n=2 and q=1) (see Churchill[1], Simmons[4]).

3 Method. Using the general prolongation formula we obtained the mostgeneral solution for one-dimensional heat conduction equation (2.1.1) (see Olver[2]and Olver [3]).

4 Method of Solution.4.1 Main Theorem. The most general solution of heat conduction equation

xxt uku 0 ...(4.1.1)

is given by tktxxtu 602

52

6536 41/exp.41/1

txttettxef ,41/,41/2 262

16544 ...(4.1.2)

where 61 ,..., are real constants and an arbitrary solution to the heat equation.

Page 153: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

149

By using the following lemmas we proved the main theorem (4.1).4.2 Lemma:

Let u

utyxt

utyxx

utyxv

,,,,,,,,, ...(4.2.1)

be a symmery on .UX Then the smooth coefficient functions , and are

given by txutxutxttx ,,,, and ,, where and are arbitary

functions.Proof. Firstly we determine the second prolongation of v by using (1.1.2) to

tt

tt

xt

xt

xx

xx

t

t

x

x

uuuuuvvpr

2...(4.2.2)

and the coefficients present in (4.2.2) can be calculated by using (1.1.3). Using theinfinitesimal criterion (1.2.1) takes the form

xxt k 0 ...(4.2.3)

By substituting the value of t and xx in equation (4.2.3) and replacing tu by

,0 xxuk then equating the coefficient of the terms in the first and second orderparitial derivatives of u, finally we find the determining equations as follows

Table1: The Determining Equations TableMonomial Cofficient

xtxuu uk 020 (a)

xtu xk 020 (b)2

xxu uu kk 20

20 (c)

xxx uu 2uuk 2

00 (d)

xxxuu uxuu kkk 02

00 32 (e)

xxu xuxxtu kkk 202

00 (f)

3xu uuk 00 (g)

2xu xuuuk 20 0 (h)

xu xxxut k 20 (j)

xxt k 0 (k) ...(4.2.4)

The reqirement for (a) and (b) is that be a function of t.(e) shows that does not

depend on u.(h) shows that be linear in txutxutxu ,,,, so, for functions

and .

4.3 Lemma. The most general infinitesimal symmetry of the Heat conduction

Page 154: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

150

equation has coefficient functions of the form ,42 6541 xtctcxcc

2642 42 tctcc and txutkxcxckc ,2/1 0

26503 where c1,...,c6

are arbitrary constants.

Proof. Using lemma (4.2), the equation (f) require ttxso txt 2/1,,2

where is only function of t. We infer from xt kj 02 implies be at most a

quadratic function in x given by txkxk ttt 02

0 2/18/1 where is only

function of t. At the end the equation (k) requires that both and be the solution

of the heat conduction equation, i.e., xxt k 0 and .0 xxt k Using the

determining equation of , we find that is quadratic in t, and , is linear in t.

Since all the determining equations are satisfied then the most general infinitesimalsymmetry of the heat conduction equation has coefficient functions of the form

26426541 42,42 tctccxtctcxcc and tkxcxckc 0

26503 2/1

txu , where c1,...,c6 are arbitrary constants and tx, is an arbitrary solution

of the Heat conduction equation.4.4 Lemma. The infinitesimal symmetires of the Heat conduction equation isspanned by the six vector field ,2,,, 4321 txutx txvuvvv

,/12 05 ux xuktv , /244 0022

6 utx uktkxttxv and the infinite-

dimensional sub algebra ., utxv

Proof. The proof is evient by using lemma (4.2) and lemma (4.3).4.5 Lemma. The symmetry Lie algebra of the heat conduction equation is

spanned by the six-vector field v1,...,v6 and the infinite-dimensional sub algebra v .

Proof : The commutation relations between these vector fields as followsTable 2: The Commutation Relation Table

v1 v2 v3 v4 v5 v6 v

v1 0 0 0 v1 30/1 vk 52vx

vv2 0 0 0 2v2 2v1 34 24 vv

tv

v3 0 0 0 0 0 0 v

v4 -v1 -2v2 0 0 v5 2v6 'v

v5 30 2/1 vk -2v1 0 -v5 0 0 ''v

v6 -2v5 2v3-4v40 -2v6 0 0 '''v

vx

vt

v v ' v '' v ''' v 0

Page 155: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

151

where 02

0 /24''',/2'',2' ktxtxtkxttx txxtx by the

above table 2 we find that forms the Lie algebra with Lie bracket operation.

5 Result.5.1 Theorem. The one- parameter groups Gi generated by the vi are given asfollows

exp.,,,2(:,,:,,,:,,,:,,,: 52

4321 utytxGutexeGuetxGutxGutxG

tkxtutttxGtxtxGktx 41/exp.41.,41/,41/:,,,:)),/)(( 02

602

where group ,6,...,1iGi is a symmetry group.

Proof. The one parameter groups ,6,...,1iGi are obtained by using the lemma

4.4 and . ~,~,~,,exp utxutxvi

5.2 Theorem. The group invariant solution to the Heat conduction equationcorresponding to its different symmetry groups are given by the function

, ,,,,,, 24321 texefutxfeutxfutxfu

,,,,,2./exp 025 txtxfuttxfktxu

,41/,41/.41/exp.

411

026 tttxftkx

tu

where txfu , be an

given solution to the Heat equation, tx, any other solution and be a real

number.Proof. The group invariant solutions of Heat conduction equation are obtained

by using the relation utxutx ~,~,~,, and putting the values of x,t and u in given

solution txfu , for each symmetry group Gi given in theorem 5.1.

Proof of Main Theorem 4.1. The most general solution txgfu , of the Heat

conduction equation is obtained by group transformations vg exp

1166 exp...exp vv of given solution txfu , and using theorem 5.2 as follows

tktxxtu 602

52

653 41/exp.41/1

txttetltxe ,41/,41/2 262

16544

where 61 ,..., are real constant and an arbitrary solution to the Heat equation.

Page 156: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

152

6. Conclusion: In our investigation the groups G3 and G reflect the

linearity of the Heat conduction equation. The G1 and G2 are the time and spaceinvariance of the equation respectively, and reflect the fact that Heat conductionequation has constant coefficients. The group G4 is well known scaling symmetrygroup. The group G5 represent a kind of Galiean boost to a moving corrdinateframe. The group G6 is a genuinely local group of transformations and if u=c bea constant solution then the function

tkxtcu 41/exp.41/ 02

be a solution. The fundamental solution of Heat conduction equation be obtained

by substituting ,/c at the point .4/1,0, 00 tx Now, by translating the

above solution in t using G2, with replaced by ,4/1 we get the fundamental

solution of the problem in the form .4/exp.41/1 02 tkxtu

7. Discussion. The general solution of Heat equation is invarient under

its different symmetry groups ,6,...,1iGi acting on the independent variables.

8. Special Cases:8.1 If take k0=1 then the most general solution to the Heat conduction equation

xxt uu ...(8.1.1)

is given

ttxxtu 62

52

6536 41/exp41/1

txttettxef ,41/,41/2 262

16544 ...(8.1.2)

where 61,..., are real constants and an arbitrary solution (see Olver[2], page

120).ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

The authors are grateful to thank of Ex. Professor M.A. Pathan, Departmentof mathematics, Aligarh Muslim University, Uttar Pradesh, India, for givenvaluable and useful suggestions towards the improvement of this paper.

REFERENCES[1] R.V. Churchill, Operational Mathematics ,3rdedition, McGraw-Hill Kogakusha Ltd., 1972.[2] P. J. Olver, Application of Lie Groups to Differential Equations, Second Edition, Springer-Verlag-

New York, Inc.,1993.[3] P. J. Olver, Symmetry Groups and Group Invariant Solutions of Parital Differential Equation, Diff.

Geom, 14 (1979) 497-542.[4] G. F. Simmons, Differential Equations with Applications and Historical Notes, 2nd., Mc. Graw Hill,

Inc., New York, 1991.

Page 157: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

A GENERALIZATION OF MULTIVARIABLE POLYNOMIALSBy

R.C. Singh Chandel and K.P. TiwariDepartment of Mathematics

D.V. Postgraduate College, Orai-285001, Uttar Pradesh, IndiaE-mail :[email protected]

(Received : October 7, 2007)

ABSTRACTIn the present paper, we introduce multivariable analogue of Chandel

polynomials [5] and Chandel-Agrawal polynomials [6], Our polynomials are alsogeneralization of multivariable polynomials due to authors Chandel and Tiwari([7],(1.5)).2000 Mathematics subject classification : Primary 33C65; Secondary 33C70.Keywords: Multivariable Analogue of Chandel and Chandel-Agrawal polynomials,Multivariable polynomials due to Chandel and Tiwari.

1.Introduction. Bell polynomials [8] are defined as

(1.1) , ;1,dxd

DeDehgH hgnhgnn

where h is constant and g is some specified function of x.Shrivastava [9] derived from above the polynomials defined by

(1.2) hgn

hgn e

dxd

xeghG

, .

Singh [10] introduced generalized Truesdell polynomials defined byRodrigues’ formula

(1.3) dxd

exexprxTrr pxnpx

n ,,, .

Chandel ([1],[2],[3],[4]) introduced and studied a class of polynomialsdefined by Rodrigues’ formula

(1.4) dxd

xexexprxT kx

pxnx

pxkn

rr

,,,, ,

where 1k .

For 1k , (1.4) reduces to (1.3)Srivastava and Singhal [11] also studied slight variation of (1.4) in

the form

Page 158: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

154

(1.5) rn

krknn pxx

dxd

xpxxn

kprxG

exp exp

!1

,,, 1

Further to generalize the polynomials defined by (1.1), (1.2), (1.3)(1.4) and (1.5), Chandel [5] introduced and studied a class of polynomialsdefined by Rodrigues’ formula

(1.6) , ,, hgnx

hgn eekghG

where h is independent of x and g is suitable function of x differentiableany number of times.

Later on Chandel and Agrawal [6] to generalize (1.5) introduced aclass of polynomials defined by

(1.6) ,11,, xhgxhgghS nx

kn

where , h,k are any numbers real or complex independent of x and g(x) isany suitable function of x.

Here in the present paper, we introduce and study multivariableanalogue of Chandel polynomials (1.5) and Chandel-Agrawal polynomials(1.6) defined through Rodrigues’ formula

(1.7) mkkhhb

nn ggG mm

m,...,1

,...,;,...,;,...,

11

1

bmm

nx

nx

bmm ghghghgh m

m ...1 ......1 1111

1

1

where b, h1,...,hm, mkk ,...,1 are real or complex numbers independent of

mxx ,...,1 ; while gi is function of xi differetiable any number of times and

i

kix x

x i

i

, 1ik ; i=1,...,m.

It is clear that

(1.8) m

kkbhbhbnnb

ggG mm

m,...,lim 1

,...,;,...,;,...,

11

1

.,,...,, 1111 mmmnn kghGkghGm

Also in addition for m=1, we can write

(1.9) xghGgG n

kbhbn

b,,lim ,/,

,

where xghGn ,, are polynomials due to Chandel [5] defined by (1.5)Also for m=1, (1.7) reduces to (1.6). That is

(1.10) . ,,;; ghSgG kbn

khbn

where ghS kbn ,, are polynomials due to Chandel and Agrawal [6] defined

through (1.6).

Page 159: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

155

Also chossing riiiii pxxgk log,1 (i=1,...,m) and replacing b by

–b, (1.7) reduces to the multivariable polynomials due to authors Chandeland Tiwari ([7],(1.5)] defined by Rodriguies' formula

(1.8) mpprrkkb

nn xxT nmmm

m,...,1

,...,;,...,;,...,;;...;;,...,

1111

1

brmmmm

r mxpxxpx

1111 log...log1 1

brmmm

rnx

nx

mm

mxpxxpx loglog1... 11111

11

1

where ni are positive integers , iiii krkb ,,1,, are arbitrary numbers real

or complex independent of all variables mixi ,....,1; .2. Generating Relation. Starting with Rodrigues’ formula (1.7),

we have

!

...!

,...,1

1

0,...,1

,...,;,...,;,...,

1

1

11

1m

nm

n

nnm

kkhhbnn n

tnt

ggGm

m

mm

m

, ...1...1 11...

1111 b

mmttb

mm ghgheghgh mxmx

Thus making an appeal to the well known result due to Chandel ([1, p.105eq. (2.5)]; also see Srivastava-Singhal [10, p.76 eq. (1.12)])

(2.1)

11

1

11 kk

xt

txk

xfxfe ,

where k1 and f(x) admits Taylor’s series expansion, we finally derivegenerating relation

(2.2)

!...

!,...,

1

1

0,...,1

,...,;,...,;,...,

1

1

11

1m

nm

n

nnm

kkhhbnn n

tnt

ggGm

m

mm

m

11

111

1111

1111

1...1kk

bmm

xtk

xghghgh

b

kkmm

mm

mmxtk

xgh

1

1111

... .

Page 160: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

156

3. Applications of Generating Relation. An appeal to generatingrelation (2.2) gives

(3.1) mkkhhbb

nn ggG mm

m,...,1

,...,;,...,;',...,

11

1

mkkhhb

ss

n

s

n

sm

kkhhbsnsn

ns

ns ggGggG mm

n

i

m

m

mm

mm

m

m,...,,...,...... 1

,...,;,...,;',...,

0 01

,...,;,...,;,...,

11

1

111

11

1

1

,

which can be further generalized in the form:

(3.2) m

kkhhbbnn ggG mmq

m,...,1

,...,;,...,;...,...,

111

1

1111 1

111

111

1

... ... 11

,...,;,...,;,..., ,...,......

nss nss

q

jm

kkhhbss

ns

ns

q mmqm

mm

m

m

mjijggG

mkkhhb

ss ggG mmq

mqq,...,... 1

,...,;,...,;,...,

11

1.

4. Recurrence Relations. Starting with generating relation (2.2),we have

!

...!

,...,...11

1

0,...,1

,..,;,...,;1,...,11

1

1

11

1m

nm

n

nnm

kkhhbnnmm n

tnt

ggGghghm

m

mm

m

11

111

111

1

1

0,...,1

,...,;,...,;,...,

11

1

1

11

1

11

1!

...!

,...,kkm

nm

n

nnm

kkhhbnn

xtk

xgh

nt

nt

ggGm

m

mm

m

1

1111

...

mm kk

mm

mmm

xtk

xgh

!...

!,...,

1

1

0,...,1

,...,;,...,;,...,

1

1

11

1m

nm

n

nnm

kkhhbnn n

tnt

ggGm

m

mm

m

0,.., 1

11

,...,;,...,;,...,

1

111

1 !...

!,...,

m

mmm

mnn m

nm

n

mkkhhb

nn nt

nt

ggG

0 0

1 11

111111

1

1

1

11

111...11

s s

ks

kmmm

smsmk

sks

sm

m

m

mm

mxtkxhxtkxh

!

...!

,...,1

1

0,...,1

,...,;,...,;,...,

1

1

11

1m

nm

n

nnm

kkhhbnn n

tnt

ggGm

m

mm

m

Page 161: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

157

0,.., 1

11

,...,;,...,;,...,

1

111

1 !...

!,...,

m

mmm

mnn m

nm

n

mkkhhb

nn nt

nt

ggG

0 01

1

111

1

111

1 1

1

11

1

1

1 !1

1s r

rrk

s

ss t

rxk

ks

xh

0 0

1

!1

1...

1

m m

mm

m

m

ms r

rm

m

rkmm

sm

msmsm t

rxk

ks

xh .

Now equating the coefficiants of mnm

n tt ...11 both the sides, we derive

the recurrence relation

(4.1) mkkhhb

nnmm ggGghgh mm

m,...,...1 1

,...,;,...,;1,...,11

11

1

0 0

111

1

1111

,...,;,...,;,...,

1

1

1

111

1

11

11

1,...,

s

n

r

rkssm

kkhhbnn xk

ks

xhggG mm

m

0 0

11

,..,;,...,;,...,, 1

1...,...,11

211

m

m

m

mm

m

m

m

mm

ms

n

r

rkmm

rm

msmsmm

kkhhbnnrn xk

ks

xhggG

mkkhhb

rnnn ggG mm

mmm,...,1

,..,;,...,;,,...,

11

11 .

5. Differential Recurrence Relations. Differentiating (2.2)partially with respect to t1, we have

!...

!!1,...,

2

2

1

11

0,...,1

,..,;,..,;,...,

21

1

11

1m

nm

nn

nnm

kkhhbnn n

tnt

nt

ggGm

m

mm

m

1/111111111

1111 11'...1

kkkkbmm xtkxghghgh

1

1/111/11111

111

11...

111

11

b

kkmmm

mmmkk mmxtk

xgh

xtk

xghb

Therefore,

0,..., 2

2

1

11

1,...,;,...,;

,...,111

2111

1 !...

!!1,...,...1

m

mmm

mnn m

nm

nn

mkkhhb

nnmm nt

nt

nt

ggGghgh

Page 162: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

158

0

111

1

1111

1

11

1

1 11

's

sk

s

k xkk

kgxbh

!

...!

,...,1

11

0,...,

,...,;,...,;1,...,

1

1

11

1m

nm

n

mnn

kkhhbnn n

tnt

ggGm

m

mm

m

.

Thus equating the coefficients of mnm

n tt ...11 both the sides, we derive

recurrence relation :

(5.1) mkkhhb

nnnmm ggGghgh mm

m,...,...1 1

,...,;,...,;,...,,111

11

21

1

1

11

211

11

1

1

1

1

01

,...,;,...,;1,...,,

111

1

1111 ,...,1

1'

n

sm

kkhhbnnsn

sk

s

ns

k ggGxkk

kgxbh mm

m ,

which suggests that m-recurrence relations can be written in the followingunified form :

(5.2) mkkhhb

nnnnnmm ggGghgh mm

miii,...,...1 1

,...,;,...,;,...,,1,,...,11

11

111

mkkhhb

nnsnnn

n

s

skii

si

insi

ki ggGxk

kk

gxbh mm

miiii

i

i

ii

i

i

i

i ,...,11

' 1,...,;,...,;1

,...,,,,...,0

11

11

111

,

i=1,...,m.Again differenting (2.2) partially with respect to x1 we have

0,..., 1

11

,...,;,...,;,...,

11

111

1 !...

!,...,

m

mmm

mnn m

nm

n

mkkhhb

nn nt

nt

ggGx

1/11

111

111

11111

11111...1' kk

bmm

xtk

xghghghgbh

bmm

b

kkmmm

mm ghghbxtk

xgh

mm

...1

11... 111/11

1

1

1/111/11111

111

11...

111

11

b

kkmmm

mmmkk mmxtk

xgh

xtk

xgh

12

1111

1111

1/1111111 1

1

1111 11111' kk

kkkk xtkxtkxtkgh .

Therefore,

Page 163: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

159

!

...!

,...,...11

11

0,...,

,...,;,...,;,...,

111

1

1

11

1m

nm

n

mnn

kkhhbnnmm n

tnt

ggGx

ghghm

m

mm

m

0,..., 1

11

,...,;,...,;,...,11

1

111

1 !...

!,...,'

m

mmm

mnn m

nm

n

mkkhhb

nn nt

nt

ggGgbh

0,..., 1

11

,...,,,..,;1,...,11

1

111

1 !...

!,...,'

m

mmm

mnn m

nm

n

mkkhhb

nn nt

nt

ggGgbh

0 0 1

1111

1

111

111

1

111

11 1

111

1

11

1

1!

112

1!

11

1

s s

ssk

s

kssk

s st

xkkk

tkxts

xkk

i

.

Thus equating the coefficients of mnm

n tt ...11 , we derive differential

recurrence relation.

(5.3) mkkhhb

nnmm ggGx

ghgh mm

m,...,...1 1

,...,;,...,;,...,

111

11

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

11

10

111

1111

,...,;,...,;1,...,11 1

11

',...,'n

s

sk

s

nsm

kkhhbnn

imm

mxk

kgbhggGgbh

1

0 1

111

11111

,...,;,...,;1,...,,

1

1 1

1

1

111

211 12

1',...,n

s s

ns

km

kkhhbnnsn k

kkxgbhggG mm

m

mkkhhb

nnsn

sk ggGxk mm

m,...,1 1

,...,;,...,;1,...,,

111

11

211

11

,

which further suggests m-differential recurrence relations in the followingunified form :

(5.4) mkkhhb

nni

mm ggGx

ghgh mm

m,...,...1 1

,...,;,...,;,...,11

11

1

i

i

ii

i

i

i

mm

m

n

s

skii

si

nsiim

kkhhbnnii xk

kgbhggGgbh

0

11

,...,;,...,;1,..., 1

11

',...,' 11

1

1

0

111

,...,;,...,;1,...,,,,..., 1

21',...,11

111

i

i i

i

i

imm

miiii

n

s si

insi

kiiim

kkhhbnnsnnn k

kkxgbhggG

mkkhhb

nnsnnn

skii ggGxk mm

miiii

ii ,...,1 1

,...,;,...,;1,...,,1,,...,

1 11

111

, i=1,...,m.

Now eleminating 1'g from (5.2) and (5.4), we further finally derive:

Page 164: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

160

(5.5)

i

i

ii

i

i

i

mm

m

i

n

s

skii

si

insm

kkhhbnn

i

ki xk

kk

ggGx

x0

11

,...,;,...,;,..., 1

1,...,11

1

mkkhhb

nnsnnn ggG mm

miiii,...,1

,...,;,...,;1,...,,,,...,

11

111

mkkhhb

nnmkkhhb

nnnnn ggGggG mm

m

mm

miii,...,,..., 1

,..,;,...,;1,...,1

,...,;,...,;,...,,1,,...,

11

1

11

111

mkkhhb

nnsnnn

n

s

skii

ns ggGxk mm

miiii

i

i

iii

i,...,1 1

,...,;,...,;1,...,,,,...,

0

1 11

111

1

0

11 1121

1i

i

ii

i

i

n

s

skii

si

i

i

ii

ki xk

kk

sn

kx

mkkhhb

nnsnnn ggG mm

miiii,...,1

,...,;,...,;1,...,,1,,...,

11

111

, i=1,...,m.

REFERENCES[1] R.C.S. Chandel, Properties of Higher Transcendental Functions and Their Applications,

Ph.D. Thesis, Vikram University, Ujjain, 1970.[2] R.C.S. Chandel, A new class of polynomials, Indian J. Math., 15 (1973), 41-49.

[3] R.C.S. Chandel, A further note on the polynomials prxT kn ,,, , Indian J. Math., 16 (1974),

39-48.[4] R.C.S. Chandel, Generalized Stirling numbers and polynomials, Publ. Del. Istitut

Matematique, 22 (36) (1977), 43-48.

[5] R.C.S. Chandel, A further generalization of the class of polynomials prxT kn ,,, ,

Kyungpook Math. J., 14 (1974), 45-54.[6] R.C.S. Chandel, and S. Agrawal, A generalization of a class of polynomials, bhaananJ~ , 21

(1991) 19-25.[7] R.C.S. Chandel and K.P. Tiwari, Multivariable analogues of generating Truesdell

polynomials, bhaananJ~ , 37, (2007), 167-176.

[8] J. Riordan, An Introduction to the Combinatorial Analysis, 1958.[9] P.N. Shrivastava, On generalized Stirling numbers and polynomials, Riv. Mat. Univ.

Parma (2), 11, (1970), 233-237.[10] R.P. Singh, On generalized Truesdell polynomails, Riv. Mat. Univ. Parma (2). 8 (1967),

345-353.[11] H.M. Srivastava and J.P. Singhal, A class of polynomails defined by generalized Rodrigues’

formula, Ann. Mat. Pura Appl. (4) 90 (1971), 75-85.

Page 165: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

161

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

THE DISTRIBUTION OF SUM OF MIXED INDEPENDENT RANDOM

VARIABLES ONE OF THEM ASSOCIATED WITH H -FUNCTIONBy

Mahesh Kumar GuptaDepartment of Mathematics, M.S.J. College,

Bharatpur 321001 , Rajasthan, India(Received : September 15,2007)

ABSTRACTIn the present paper, we shall obtain the distribution of sum of two mixed

independent random variables with different probability density functions. Onewith finite probability density function and the other with infinite probability

density function associated with H -function. The method used is of Laplace

transform and its inverse. The result obtained by us is sufficiently genetral in

nature due to the presence of the H -function in the probability density function.

2000 Mathematics Subject Classification : Primary 60Exx, 62Exx; Secondary62H10.

Keywords: H -function, Laplace Transform, Distribution Function.1. Introduciton. In the study of statistical distributions, there is a vast

literature in the distribution in the linear combination of several independentrandom variables when each random variable follows a particular family ofdistributions. the works of Robins [14], Robins and Pitman [15], Kabe [10], Stacy[20]. Sricastava and Singhal [19], Mathai and Saxena [12], Malik [11], Saxena andDash [16], Goyal and Agrawal [8], Garg and Gupta [6], Garge [5], Garg and Garg[7], is worth mentioning.

It has been observed that the distribution of sum of several independentrandom variables when each random variable is of simply infinite or doubly infiniterange can easily be calculated by means of characteristic function or momentgenetating function. However, when the random variables are distributed overfinite renge, these method are not much useful and the power of integral transformmethod comes sharply into focus.

In this paper, we shall obtain the distribution of two independent randomvariables, X1 and X2, where X1 possess finite uniform probability density function

and X2 follows infinite probability density function involving H -function, given

by the equations (1.1) and (1.2) respectively. Thus

Page 166: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

162

f1(x1) =

,0

1 otherwise

ax 00a ...(1.1)

and

otherwise ,0

0, 2,,;,

;,,,2,

,1

222

,1,1

,1,1

2 xzxHeCxxfPNjjNjjj

QMjjjMjj

aAaBbb

yNMQP

x

...(1.2)

where

QMjjjMjj

QNjjNjjjNMQp Bbb

aAazHC

,1,,1

,1,,11,,1

1

;,,,,1;,1;,

...(1.3)

and the following conditions are satisfied :

(i) ,0min,0,01

jjMj

b

(ii) ,01 1 1 1

M

j

N

j

Q

Mj

P

Njjjjjjj BAA ...(1.4)

(iii) The parameters of H -function are real and so restricted that 22 xf remains

positive for 02 x .

The H function occurring in (1.2) is a generalization of well-known FoxH-function [4]. It has been introduced by Inayat Hussain [9] and represented asfollows

QMjjjMjj

PNjjNjjjNMQP

NMQP Bbb

aAazHzH

,1,,1

,1,,1,,

,, ;,,

,;,

,12

1

w

wdz ...(1.5)

Q

Mj

P

Njjj

Bjj

M

j

N

j

Ajjjj

ab

ab

j

j

1 1

1 1

1

1

, ...(1.6)

Page 167: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

163

where aj (j=1,...,P) and bj ( j=1,...,Q) are complex parameters, Pjj ,...,10

and Qjj ,...,10 (not all zero simultaneously) and the exponents Aj (j=1,...,N)

and Bj ( j=M+1,...,Q) can take on non-integer values. For the absolute convergence

of the H -function, the sufficient conditions given by (ii) of eq. (1.4) have been

given by Buschman and Srivastava [1].

The behaviour of the H -function for small values of |z| follows easily

from a result recently given by Rathie [13,p.306, eq. (6.9)]. We have

.0,/Remin.01

,,

zbzzH jjMj

NMQP (1.7)

When all the exponents Aj and Bj take on integral values, the H -function

reduces to the well-known Fox H-function [4]. We mention below give few some

interesting special cases of the H -function [9, pp.4126-4127], which are not the

particular cases of Fox H-function.(i) The generalized Riemann Zeta function [2, p.27, eq. (1)] and [9, p.4127,eq.(27)]

0

2,12,2 ;1,,1,0

;1,1,1;1,01,,

n

np p

pzHz

npz . (1.8)

The above function is the generalization of the well-known generalized(Hurwitz's) Zeta function (p,) and Reimann Zeta function (p) [2,p.24, eq.(1),p.32, eq.(1)].(ii) The polylogarithm of order p [2, p.30, eq. 1.11 (14)],

pp

zHpzzfnz

pzFn

p

n

;1,0,1,1;1,1,1;1,1

1,,,1

2,12,2 . (1.9)

For p=2 the above function reduces into Euler's dilogarithm [2,p.31, eq. (22)].(iii) The exact partition function of the Gaussian model in statistical mechanics[9,p. 4127, eq. 28].

dd

HdF dd 1;1,1,1,0;1,2/1,1;1,0,1;1,0

141

41

,' 23,12,32/

2

2/

2

. (1.10)

In the p.d.f defined by (1.2), if we reduce H -function to Fox H-function by

taking Aj=Bj=1, we get the p.d.f. defined by Mathai and Saxena [12, eq. (8), p. 163],which on taking the limit as 0, gives the p.d.f. of studied by Srivastava and

Page 168: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

164

Singhal [19]. Further, on specializing the H -function as given above we can obtain

various new p.d.f. s involving the functions defined by equation (1.8), (1.9) and(1.10).

2. Distribution of the Mixed Independent Random VariablesTheorem. Let X1 and X2 be two independent random variables having theprobability density function defined by (1.1) and (1.2) respectively. Then theprobability density function of

21 XXY (2.1)

is given by

,1 ygyg ay 0

,21 ygyg ya (2.2)

where

0 ,1,,1

,1,,11,1,11 1;,,;,

,,1;,1;,

!n QMjjjMjj

pNjjNjjjNMQp

n

nBbbanAa

xyHny

aCy

yg

0y (2.3)

and

0

1,1,12 !n

NMQP

n

ayzHn

aya

ayCyg

aynBbb

anAa

QMjjjMjj

pNjjNjjj

,1;,,;,,,1;,1;,

,1,,1

,1,,1(2.4)

C is given by (1.3) and the following conditions are satisfied :

(i) ,0 0 , 0min1

jjMj

b

(ii)

M

j

N

j

Q

Mj

P

Njjjjjjj BAA

1 1 1 1

0 (2.5)

(iii) The parameters of H - function are real and so restricted that yg1 , 0y

and ,2 yg ay , remains positive.

Proof. To obtain the probability density function of Y=X1+X2, we use the methodof Laplace transform and its inverse. Let the Laplace transform of Y be denoted by

Page 169: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

165

sy , then

sxfLsxfLsy ;; 2211 (2.6)

The Laplace transform of 11 xf is a simple integral and to evaluate the

Laplace transform of 22 xf , we express the H -function in terms of Mellin-Barnes

type contour integral (1.5), interchange the order of 2x - and integrals and

evaluate x2 integral as gamma integral to get

QMjjjMjj

pNjjNjjjNMQp

as

Bbb

aAaszH

asC

se

yg,1,1

,1,11,,1 ;,,

,,1;,1,;,1

(2.7)Now, we break above expression in two parts, as follows

QMjjjMjj

pNjjNjjjNMQp Bbb

aAaszH

sasC

yg,1,1

,1,11,,1 ;,,

,,1;,1,;,

QMjjjMjj

pNjjNjjjNMQp

as

Bbb

aAaszH

sasCe

,1,1

,1,11,,1 ;,,

,,1;,1,;, (2.8)

To obtain the inverse Laplace transform of first term of eq. (2.8), we express

the H -function in contour integral, collect the terms involving 's' and take its

inverse Laplace transform and then use the known result [3, p.238, eq.8]. Writing,the confluent hypergeometric function thus obtained in series form and interpretingthe result by definition (1.5), we get the value of g1(y) as given by the eq. (2.3).

The inverse Laplace transform of second term easily follows by the valueof g1(y) and shifting property for Laplace transform.

3. Special Cases

(i) In the theorem obtained in section 2 if we take Ai=Bj=1, the p.d.f. 22 xf

reduces to the p.d.f. defined by Mathai and Saxena [12] as follows

0,

otherwise ,0

,

,

2,1

,12

,,

121

22

2

xb

azxHexCxf

Qjj

PjjNMQP

x

(3.1)

Page 170: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

166

where

Qjj

PjjNMQP b

azHC

,1

,11,,1

11 ,

,,,1

and the corresponding p.d.f. of Y as obtained from the eq. (2.2) is given by

,1 yhyh ay 0

,21 yhyh ya (3.3)

where

0 ,1

,11,1,1

11 0,,,,

,,,1

! n Qjj

PjjNMQP

n

ynb

anzyH

ny

ayC

yh (3.4)

and

0 ,1

,11,1,1

12 ,,,

,,,1

! n Qjj

PjjNMQP

n

nb

anayzH

nay

aayC

yh

ay (3.5)

Further, if we take a=1 we get a known result obtained earlier by Garg [5,eq. (2.2), p.79]. This result can be further be reduced to yield the known resultrecorded in book [17].

(ii) In the Theorem, if we reduce the H -function to generalized Riemann Zeta

function as given by relation (1.8), the p.d.f. f2(x2) assumes the following form:

otherwise ,00,,, 22

122

22

2 xpzxexCxfx

(3.6)

where

pp

zHC;1,,1,0

1;,1,;1,1,1;1,03,12,3

12 (3.7)

and the corresponding p.d.f. of Y as obtained from the eq. (2.2) is given by

ayyhyh 0 ,1

,21 yhyh ya (3.8)

where

Page 171: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

167

0

3,13,3

21 0,

1;,;1,,1,01;,1,;1,1,1;1,0

!n

n

ynp

npzyH

ny

ayC

yh (3.9)

and

0

3,13,3

22 ,

1;,,;1,,1,01;,1,;1,1,1;1,0

!n

n

aynp

npayzH

nay

aayC

yh

(3.10)ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

The author is thankful to University Grants Commission, New Delhi, forproviding necessary financial assistance to carry out the present work. The authoris also thankful to Dr. Mridula Garg for her valuable suggestions and guidanceduring the preparation of this paper.

REFERENCES[1] R.G. Buschman and H.M. Srivastava, The H-function associated with a certain class of Feynman

integrals, J. Phys. A : Math. Gen. 23 (1990), 4707-4710.[2] A. Erdélyi et al., Higher Transcendental Functions,Vol.1, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1953.[3] A. Erdélyi et al., Table of Integral Transforms, Vol. I, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1954.[4] C. Fox, The G and H functions as symmetrical Fourier kernels, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., 98 (1961)

395-429.[5] Sheekha Garg, The distribution of the sum of mixed independent random variables, Ganita

Sandesh, 6(2) (1992), 78-82.[6] M. Garg and M.K. Gupta, The distribution of the ratio of two linear functions of independent

random variables associated with Fox H-function, Bull. Cal. Math. Soc., 88 (1996), 125-130.[7] M. Garg and Sheekha Garg; The distribution of a polynomials and the ratio of product of rational

powers of independent random variables, Ganita Sandesh, 9(2), (1995), 79-85.[8] S.P. Goyal and R.K. Agrawal, The distribution of a linear combination and the ratio of products of

random variables associated with the multivariable H-function, bhaananJ~ , 9/10 (1982).[9] A.A. Inayat-Hussain, New properties of hypergeometric series derivable from Feynman integrals,

II, A generalization of the H-function J. Phys. A: Math. Gen., 20 (1987), 4119-4128.[10] D.G. Kabe, On the exact distribution of a class of multivariable test criteria, Annals Math. Soc.,

33 (1962), 1197-1200.[11] H.J. Malik, Distribution of a linear function and the ratio of two independent linear functions of

independent generalized gamma variables, National Research Logistics, 23, (1976), 339-343.[12] A.M. Mathai and R.K. Saxena. On the linear combination of stochastic, variables, Metrika, 20 (3)

(1973), 160-169.[13] A.K. Rathie, A new generalization of generalized hypergeometric functions, Le Math. Fasc. II, 52

(1997), 297-310.[14] H.E. Robbins. The asymptotic distribution of the sum of random number of variables , Bull.

Amer. Math. Soc., 54 (1948) 1151-1161.[15] H.E. Robbins and J.G. Pitman, Application of the method of mixture to variables, Australian J.

Stat., 7 (1949), 110-114.[16] S.P. Saxena and S.P. Dash, The distribution of linear combinations and ratio of product of

Page 172: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

168

independent variables associated with H-function, Vijnana Parishad Anusandhan Patrika, 22(1979), 57-65.

[17] M.D. Springer. The Algebra of Random Variables, John Wiley and Sons, New York (1979).[18] H.M. Srivastava, K.C. Gupta and S.P. Goyal. The H-Functions of One and Two Variables with

Applications, South Asian Publishers, New Delhi, Madras. (1982).[19] H.M. Srivastava and J.P. Singhal. On a class of generalized hypergeometric distributions, bhaananJ~

Sect A, 2 (1972), 1-9.[20] E.W. Stacy. A generalization of the gamma distribution, Anal. Math. Statist., 33 (1962), 1187-

1192.

Page 173: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

169

J~n–an–abha, Vol. 38, 2008

ON GENERATING RELATIONSHIPS FOR FOX'S H-FUNCTION ANDMULTIVARIABLE H-FUNCTION

ByB.B. Jaimini and Hemlata Saxena

Government Postgraduate College, Kota-324001, Rajasthan, IndiaEmail : [email protected], E-mail :[email protected]

(Received : January 15, 2008)

ABSTRACTIn this paper we have established some new results on bilinear, bilateral

and multilateral generating relationship for Fox's H-function and multivariableH-function. Some known results for the Fox's H-function and multivariable H-function are also obtained as special cases of our main findings.2000 Mathematics Subject Classification: 33C99, 33C90, 33C45Keywords : Bilateral generating functions; Fox's H-function; Multivariable H-function; Generating Function Relationships; Combinatorial identities.

1. Introduction and Results Required. Chen and Shrivastava [1] gavea family of linear, bilateral and multilateral generating functions involving the

sequence 0,

kk z defined by

zkFz vuvuk ;,...,,1;;,..., 11, (1.1)

where for convenience, ; abbreviates the array of parameters

1

,...,1

, 0/0NN

and for its multivariable extension defined by ([1],p.172, equation (5.21)).

0,...,1

111

1

1 ...1

,...,,...,;,...,

r

r

kk

kr

k

k

rrrk zz

kkkA

zzZ (1.2)

rjCNkkkK jjrr ,...,1;,;;... 011 ,

where rkkA ,...,1 is a suitably bounded multiple sequence of complex numbers

and ()k denotes the Pochhammer symbol.

CNkk

kkk ;1...1

0;0,1(1.3)

Page 174: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

170

Raina [4] derived the following combinatorial identity as a special case of reductionformula in ([4],p.187, equation (15)).

012

1

;;,111

k

kzzk

kF

kk

kk

kk

1 ,1 zz (1.4)

where

111

knk

nkn

. (1.5)

Recently in an earlier paper Jaimini et al. [3] generalized the results ofabove cited paper [1]. They proved six theorems on the generating functionrelationship in view of the above result (1.4)

The Fox's H-function defined and represented in the following manner([2],p.408), see also ([5], p.265, equation (1.1))

Lqq

ppnmqp dz

iba

zH21

,,,

, (1.6)

where

p

njjj

q

mjjj

n

jjj

m

jjj

ab

ab

11

11

1

1

(1.7)

The multivariable H-function defined and represented in the followingmanner ([6],pp 251-252, equations (C.1)-(C.3)).

rzzH ,...,1

r

rrr

rr

qrj

rjqjjq

rjjj

prj

rjpjjp

rjjj

r

nmnmnoqpqpqp ddb

cca

z

zH

,1,111

,11

,1,111

,111

,,...,,:,,,...,:, ,;...;,:,...,;

,;...;,:,...,;

1

111

11

1

1 ;......,...,......2

111111L L r

sr

srrrr

r

r dsdszzssssi (1.8)

where ; 1i

Page 175: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

171

ri

scsd

scsd

si

i

i

i

ii

p

nji

ij

ij

q

mji

ij

ij

n

ji

ij

ij

m

ji

ij

ij

ii ,...,1

1

1

11

11

(1.9)

q

j

r

ji

ijj

p

nj

r

ji

ijj

n

j

r

ji

ijj

r

sbsa

sa

ss

1 11 1

1 11

1

1

,...,. (1.10)

In this paper some generating relations for Fox's H-function andmultivariable H-function defined in (1.6) and (1.8) respectively are established byfollowing the above cited work of Jaimini et al [3]. The importance of these resultslies in the fact that they provide the extensions of the results due to Srivastavaand Raina [7] and also provide a wide range of bilinear, bilateral mixed multilateralgenerating functions for simpler hypergeometric polynomials.

2. Main bilateral generating relationships involving Fox's H-function.

Result-1. Corresponding to an identically nonvanishing function szz ,...,1 of s

complex variables Nszz s ,...,1 and of (complex) order , let

0

11

1,,,, !

,...,;,...,;,

k

kskk

sm mk

tzzatzzy

vv

uusru d

cmkmkyH

,,,11,

1 CNNkak ,;;;0 0 (2.1)

and

mn

kmnksmn tyAzzyM

/

0

,,,,1

,,,,,, ;;,...,;

!!

,...,11 11

mknmk

zza

mknmkn

mknmkn k

skk

(2.2)

where

vv

uusrvu

l l

ll

mnk dclmkn

yHlmkn

ttyA

,,,,1

!; 1,

,10

,,,,, (2.3)

Page 176: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

172

then

0

1,,,,,

, ;,...,;n

nsmn tzzyM

m

m

sl

mt

tzz

t

yt 11,,,,

1;,...,;

11 (2.4)

Result-2. Let

0

,,

11

2,, ,

,,...,1;,...,;

k vv

uusrvu

kskk

mk

sm dc

yHtzza

tzzy (2.5)

and

mn

kmnksmn tyUzzyN

/

0

,,,,,1

,,,,,, ;;,...,;

!

,...,111 11

mkn

zza

mknmkn

mknmkn k

skkmk

(2.6)

where

0

1,1,1

,,,,, ,,,

,,,

!;

l vv

uusrvu

l

ll

mnk mkmkdclmkn

yHlmkn

ttyU (2.7)

then

0

1,,,,,

, ;,...,;n

nsmn tzzyN

m

m

smt

tzz

t

yt

112

,,1

1;,...,;

11 ...(2.8)

Result 3. Let tzzy sm ;,..,; 12

,, is defined in 2.5 and

mn

kmnksmn tyVzzyT

/

0

,,,,,,1

,,,,,,, ;;,...,;

!

,...,111 11

mkn

zza

mknmkn

mknmkn k

skmk

k

...(2.9)

Page 177: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

173

where

0 1

,,,,,, !

;l

ll

mnk lmknt

tyV

,,,,,.,1,

1,1 kmkdClkmkn

yHvv

uusrvu ...(2.10)

then

0

1,,,,,,

, ;,...,;n

nsmn tzzyT

m

m

smt

tzz

t

yt 11

2,,

1

1;,...,;

11 ...(2.11)

Result -4. Let

011

4,,,,, ,...,1;,...,;

k

kskk

mksm tzzatzzy

,,,,.,11,

1,1 mkkmkdCkmkmk

yHvv

uusrvu ...(2.12)

and

mn

kmnksmn tyWzzy

/

0

,,,,,,1

,,,,,,, ;;,...,;

!

,...,111 11

mkn

zza

mknmkn

mknmkn k

skkmk

...(2.13)

where

0

,,,,,, !

;l l

ll

mnk lmknt

tyW

,,,,.,11,

1,1 mkkmkdClkmkn

yHvv

uusrvu ...(2.14)

then

Page 178: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

174

0

1,,,,,,

, 1;,...,;n

smn tzzy

m

m

smt

tzz

t

y11

4,,,,,

1;,...,;

1 ...(2.15)

Proof of Result-1. We denote the left hand side of the assertion 2.4 of Result-1 byH[x,y,t] then we use the definitions in 2.2 and 2.3, we have:

0,

/

0 ! ,,

ln

mn

k l

ll

lmknt

tyxH

!!

,...,11 11

mknmk

zza

mknmkn

mknmkn k

skk

n

vv

uusrvu t

dClmkn

yH ,,

,, ,11,,1

Now using the definition of Fox's H-function from 1.6 and changing theorder of summation and integration and then on making series rearrangementtherein, it takes following form:

0, 0 ! 21

,,ln k l

ll

L lmkmknt

yi

tyxH

dtlmkmknnmk

zza

nmkn

nmkmkn mknkskk

!!

,...,11 11

Now in view of the relation

nn

nn

lni

1

! ...(2.16)

and then interpreting the inner series into Gauss' hypergeometric function 2F1we have

0 0

121

,,k n

L nmkmkn

yi

tyxH

Page 179: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

175

nmkmkn

nmkmkn 11 1

nttmkmkn

mkmknF

;;,

12

dmkmkmk

tzza mkkskk .

!

,...,1

Now using the combinatorial identity 1.4 and then on interpreting theresulting contour into H-function with the help of 1.6, we atonce arrive at thedesired result in 2.4

Similarly the proof of Results-2,3,4 would run parallel to that of Result-1,which we have already detailed above fairly adequately.

3. Some Generating Relationships Involving H-Function of SeveralVariables. The Results-5,6,7,8 given below are established for the multivariable H-function defined in 1.8 by following the corresponding results proved in section-2.

Result-5. Let

0

111

5,,,, !

,...,;,...,;,...,

k

kskk

srm mk

tzzatzzyy

,,...,;1

1

1

1

1,;...;,:1,0,;...;,:,1

1

11

11r

r

vuvuvqpqpqp mkmk

ty

tyH

r

rr

rr

r

r

qrj

rjqjjq

rjjj

prj

rjpjjp

rjjj

ddb

cca

,1,111

,11

,1,111

,11

,;...;,:,...,;

,;...;,:,...,;

1

1

...(3.1)

and

mn

ksrmnksrmn tzzyyBzzyyR

/

011

,,,,,11

,,,,,, ;,...,;,...,;,...,;,...,

kskk

mknmk

zza

mknmkn

mknmkn

!!

,...,11 11

...(3.2)

where

Page 180: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

176

0

1,,,

,, ! ;,...,

l l

ll

rmnk lmknt

tyyB

,,...,;1 1

1,;...;,:1,0,;...;,:,1

11

11r

r

vuvuvqpqpqp lmkn

y

yH rr

rr

r

r

qrj

rjqjjq

rjjj

prj

rjpjjp

rjjj

ddb

cca

,1,111

,11

,1,111

,11

,;...;,:,...,;

,;...;,:,...,;

1

1

...(3.3)

then

0

11,,,,,

, ;,...,;;,...,n

nsrrmn tzzyyyR

m

m

sr

m t

tzz

t

y

t

yt

r 1115

,,,,1

;,...,;1

,...,1

11 ...(3.4)

Reult-6. Let

0111

6,, . ,...,1;,...,;,...,

k

kskk

mksrm tzzatzzyy

r

rrr

rr

qrj

rjqjjq

rjjj

prj

rjpjjp

rjjj

r

vuvuvqpqpqp ddb

cca

y

yH

,1,111

,11

,1,111

,111

,,...,,:1,0,,...,,:,1 ,;...;,:,...,;

,;...;,:,...,;

1

111

11 ...(3.5)

and

mn

ksrmnksrmn zzyyEzzyyS

/

011

,,,,,11

,,,,,, ;,...,;,...,;,...,;,...,

kskkmk

mkn

zza

mknmkn

mknmkn

!

,...,111 11

...(3.6)

where

0

1,,,

,, ! ;,...,

l l

ll

rmnk lmknt

tyyE rr

rr

vuvuvqpqpqpH ,;...;,:1,0

,;...;,:,111

11

Page 181: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

177

r

r

qrj

rjqjjq

rjjjr

prj

rjpjjp

rjjjr

rddbmkmk

ccalmkn

y

y

,1,111

,11

1

,1,111

,11

11

,;...;,:,...,;,...,;

,;...;,:,...,;,...,;

1

1 ...(3.7)

then

0

11,,,,,

, ;,...,;,...,n

nsrmn tzzyyS

m

m

sr

m t

tzz

t

y

t

yt

r 1116

,,1

1;,...,;

1,...,

11

1 ...(3.8)

Result-7. Let tzzyyy srrm ;,..,;;,..., 116

,, is defined in 3.5

and

mn

krmnksrmn tyyFzzyyU

/

01

,,,,,,11

,,,,,,, ;,...,;,...,;,...,

kskkmk

mkn

zza

mknmkn

mknmkn

!

,...,111 11

...(3.9)

where

0

1,,,,

,, ! ;,...,

l l

ll

rmnk lmknt

tyyF rr

rr

vuvuvqpqpqpH ,;...;,:1,0

,;...;,:1,111

11

r

r

qrj

rjqjjq

rjjjr

prj

rjpjjp

rjjjr

rddbmkmkk

ccalkmkn

y

y

,1,111

,11

1

,1,111

,11

11

,;...;,:,...,;, ,...,;

,;...;,:,...,;, ,...,;

1

1

...(3.10)then

0

11,,,,,,

, ;,...,;,...,n

nsrmn tzzyyU

m

m

sr

m t

tzz

t

y

t

yt

r 1116

,,1

1;,...,;

1,...,

11

1 ...(3.11)

Page 182: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

178

Result-8. Let

0111

8,,,,, .,...,1;,...,;,...,

k

kskk

mksrm tzzatzzyy

r

r

rr

rr

qrj

rjqjjq

rjjjr

prj

rjpjjp

rjjjr

r

vuvuvqpqpqp

ddbmkkmk

ccamkkmk

y

y

H

,1,111

,11

1

,1,111

,11

11

,;...;,:1,0,;...;,:1,1

,;...;,:,...,;,...,;

,;...;,:,...,;,...,;1

1

1

11

11

...(3.12)

and

mn

krmnksrmn tyyFzzyyV

/

01

,,,,,,11

,,,,,,, ;,...,;,...,;,...,

kskk

mk zzamknmkn

mknmkn

,...,111

1

1

...(3.13)

where

0

1,,,,

,, ! ;,...,

l l

ll

rmnk lmknt

tyyG

rr

rr

vuvuvqpqpqpH ,;...;,:1,0

,;...;,:1,111

11

r

r

qrj

rjqjjq

rjjjr

prj

rjpjjp

rjjjr

rddbmkkmk

ccalmkkn

y

y

,1,111

,11

1

,1,111

,11

11

,;...;,:,...,;,...,;

,;...;,:,...,;,...,;1

1

1 (3.14)

then

0

11,,,,,,

, ;,...,;,...,n

nsrmn tzzyyV

m

m

sr

mt

tzz

t

y

t

yt

r 1116

,,,,,1

;,...,;1

,...,1

11 ...(3.15)

4. Special Cases. If in Results-1 to 5 and in Result-8 we take

0,1,...,1 rk zz and these results reduce to the respective known

results in ([7], pp.37-44, equations (1.10),(1.14),(3.3),(5.3),(6.9),(6.6) at 0 ).

Page 183: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

179

If in the results of section -2, 3 we take 0 , and 1,...,1 rk zz then

these results are reduced into certain families of new generating functionsassociated with the Fox's H-function and multivariable H-function, but we skipthe results here.

All the results of section 2 and 3, the product of the essentially arbitarycoefficients

00 Nkak

and the identically nonvanishing function

CNsNkzz sk ;,; ,..., 01

can indeed be notationally into one set of essentially arbitrary (and indenticallynonvanishing) coefficients depending on the order and on one, two or more

variables. In view to applying such results as section 2 above to derive bilateralgenerating relationships involving Fox's H-function and as section 3 to derivemixed multilateral generating relationship involving multivariable H-function.

We find it to be convenient to specialize ak and sk zz ,...,1 individually as well as

separately. Our general results asserted by section 2 and 3 can be shown to yieldvarious families of bilateral and mixed multilateral generating relation for thespecific functions generated in these families but there are not recorded due tolack of space.

REFERENCE[1] M.P. Chen and H.M. Srivastava, Orthogonality relations and generating functions for Jcobi

polynomials and related hypergeometric functions, Appl. Math. Comput., 68 (1995), 153-188.[2] C. Fox, The G-and H-functions as symmetrical Fourier kernesls, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., 98

(1961) 395-429.[3] B.B. Jaimini, H. Nagar and H.M. Srivastava, Certain classes of generating relations associated

with single and multiple hypergeometric functions, Adv. Stud. Contemp. Math., 12 No.1 (2006),131-142.

[4] R.K. Raina, On a reduction formula involving combinatorial coefficients and hypergeometricfunctions, Boll. Un. Math. Ital. A (Ser. 7) 4 (1990), 183-189.

[5] H.M. Srivastava and R. Panda Some bilateral generating functions for a class of generalizedhypergeometric polynomials, J. Reine Angew., Math., 283/284 (1976), 265-274.

[6] H.M. Srivastava, K.C.Gupta and S.P. Goyal, The H-function of One and Two Variables withApplications (1982), (New Delhi : South Asian Publishers), pp 251-252.

[7] H.M. Srivastava and R.K. Raina, New generating functions for certain polynomial systemsassociated with the H-functions, Hokkaido Math. J., 10 (1981), 34-45.

Page 184: ISSN 0304-9892 J~nan– abha – ßbDbB

180

Statement of ownership and particularsabout the journal

J~N

–AN

–ABHA

1. Place of Publication D.V. Postgraduate CollegeOrai-285001, U.P., India

2. Periodicity of Publication Annual

3. Printer's Name Mr. Dheeraj GuptaNationality IndianAddress Customer Gallery, Orai

Orai-285001, U.P., IndiaMobile : 9450296634

4. Publisher's Name Dr. R.C. Singh ChandelFor Vij~n –ana Parishad of India

Nationality IndianAddress D.V. Postgraduate College

Orai-285001, U.P., India

5. Editor's Name Dr. R.C. Singh ChandelNationality Indian

Address D.V. Postgraduate CollegeOrai- 285001, U.P., India

6. Name and address ofthe individuals whoown the journal andpartners of shareholders holding morethan one percent ofthe total capital

Vij~n –ana Parishad of India

D.V. Postgraduate CollegeOrai-285001, U.P., India

}}

Address :

I, Dr. R.C. Singh Chandel hereby declare that the particulars given above are trueto the best of my knowledge and belief.

Dr. R.C. Singh ChandelPublisher/Editor


Recommended